JP6733132B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, one provided with a variable ball entrance device provided in a game area is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2003-325811, A

Here, in the gaming machine, it is desired to devise a method to attract more attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention is
Based on the player's launch operation, launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can be received and a second state in which it is more difficult to receive a game ball than the first state,
Variable acceptance control means for performing state switching control of the variable acceptance means between the first state and the second state,
A specific passing portion through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific passage portion,
At a predetermined timing, a first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the specific passage part and a second mode in which the game balls are less likely to be distributed to the specific passage part than the first mode. Switching means that can be switched,
Grasping means for grasping a switching situation of the first aspect and the second aspect of the distributing means,
Equipped with
The distribution means includes a first distribution means, and a second distribution means provided at a position easier for a player to visually recognize than the first distribution means.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the grasped result of said grasping means, said variable receiving means to accepted gaming balls, the first sorting means said first distributing means in situations in which the first aspect Ri as easy to reach the, and in so that an easy to reach the second distributing means in the context the second sorting means is the first aspect, wherein the variable receiving means at first timing second Based on the first state switching control mode for setting the 1 state and the grasping result of the grasping means, the game ball received by the variable receiving means is in the situation where the first distributing means is the first aspect. Ri as difficult to reach the first distributing means, and wherein the so that an easy to reach the second distributing means in the context second sorting means is the first aspect, the variable at the second timing A second state switching control mode in which the receiving means is in the first state, and a game state shifting means capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means including any one of the first state to a specific state that can be executed a predetermined number of times. Equipped with
When the predetermined state switching control in the specific state corresponds to the state switching control in the first state switching control mode, the predetermined state switching control is set as the state switching control in the second state switching control mode. It is characterized in that it is configured to .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to games.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. FIG. 7A is a perspective view showing the configuration of the accessory device, and FIG. 9B is a plan view schematically showing the configuration of a passage provided in the accessory device. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows a accessory device. It is a perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the rotary body unit which comprises a accessory device. It is a top view which shows a rotating body unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win/win lottery. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining a result table, (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a type table, and (c) is an explanatory view for explaining an opening timing table. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for the operating port. It is a flow chart which shows information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing performed by MPU of the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows accessory control processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting. It is a flow chart which shows hit/absence judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows control start processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing under control. It is a flow chart which shows distribution processing. It is a flowchart showing a winning process. It is a flow chart which shows game state shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of each round. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each opening. It is an explanatory view for explaining a round pattern table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening/closing pattern table. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the opening/closing pattern and distribution timing during a round. In 2nd Embodiment, (a) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the result table for 1st working ports, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the result table for 2nd working ports. .. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operation opening and the distribution timing as a modified example of the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing a setting process for each round, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a round pattern table. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing in a 4th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a distribution table of each open/close pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening/closing pattern table in 5th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a distribution table of each open/close pattern. In the sixth embodiment, it is a flowchart showing the effect process executed by the MPU of the effect control device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an opening/closing pattern table, (b) It is a flowchart which shows an opening corresponding process, (c) It is an outline figure for explaining the outline of each special production. It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing processing in a 7th embodiment. (A) is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing and the distribution timing to the operating port, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of each effect mode. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing timing setting processing in an 8th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining each opening timing table. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing. It is a flow chart which shows game control processing in a 9th embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the common hold number and the variation display time of the game times, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the overlap between the common hold number and the V allocation. .. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows control start processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the winning timing to the operating port and the distribution timing. It is a flow chart which shows opening-and-closing timing setting processing in an 11th embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a mode that an opening pattern is changed. It is an explanatory view for explaining a mode that an opening pattern is changed. As a modified example of the ninth embodiment, (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type table, and (b) is a flowchart showing a variable display time setting process.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in a developed manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions being the support side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being a support side. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions being a support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its pivoting front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows almost all of a game area described later to be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent.

Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display light emitting portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as a part of the various lamp portions. In addition, speaker units 64 are provided on the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63 to output sound effects and the like according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided to the right of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, a game ball is fired toward the game area from the game ball firing mechanism 53 provided in the inner frame 13 below the game area. In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing strength of the game ball, which is fired toward the game area, that is, the momentum of the firing is changed.

The game area is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. The configuration of the game board 24 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 are attached to the surface of the game board 24, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. In addition, the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for guiding the game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism by the player rotating the launch handle 60 It is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 34.

The guide rail 34 is formed so that its exit portion faces the center of the upper part of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side opposite to the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. Shift to the department side. The exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side portion of the game area.

In the area defined as the game area on the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by the router processing are formed. In each opening, a general winning opening 35, a first operating opening (first starting ball entering portion) 38, a second operating opening (second starting ball entering portion) 39, an accessory device 150, a through gate 41, a variable display unit. 42, a main display section 43, a character display section 44, and the like are provided.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 35, the first operating opening 38, the second operating opening 39, and the accessory device 150, the detection sensor (first operating sensor 38a) is arranged on the back side of the game board 24. , The second operation sensor 39c and the entrance sensor 179 (see FIG. 6)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the first operating port 38 and a ball enters the second operating port 39, seven prize balls are paid out and the general winning port 35 enters. When a ball is generated, eight prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the accessory device 150, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the number of prize balls associated with the second operation port 39 is larger than the number of prize balls associated with the first operation port 38. The number may differ.

In addition, an out port 45 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports or the like are discharged from the game area through the out port 45. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 46 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharging from the game area after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area continues to flow down is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the out port 45, the game ball to the accessory device 150, the first operating port 38, the second operating port 39, or the through gate 41. Ball entry is also referred to as winning.

The accessory device 150 is arranged in a substantially central portion of the game board 24. The first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39 are arranged side by side in the lateral direction below the accessory device 150 in the game board 24. Two first working ports 38 are provided on the left and right of the accessory device 150, and a second working port 39 is disposed at a position sandwiched by the left and right first working ports 38. In relation to the accessory device 150, the left and right first operating ports 38 are arranged so as to sandwich the accessory device 150, and a game ball that does not win the accessory device 150 has one of the first operating ports. 38 can be reached (the prize can be won). In addition, the distance between the first working ports 38 and the accessory device 150 in the lateral direction is equal to or greater than the diameter of one game ball, and the space between the first operating port 38 and the accessory device 150 is set. A game ball can be flowed down.

Further, the second operation port 39 is arranged below the accessory device 150. The second operating port 39 is arranged slightly below both first operating ports 38, and the game ball that has not entered the accessory device 150 or the first operating port 38 can reach the second operating port 39. (It is possible to enter the ball).

The second working port 39 is provided with an electric accessory 39a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 39a is connected to the electric accessory drive unit 39b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric accessory drive unit 39b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is placed in either the open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 39a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 39, and when the electric accessory 39a is in the open state, the winning in the second operating port 39 is possible.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a state in which a game ball is easily won into the second operating port 39 and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur than a state in which a prize is not impossible but the above-mentioned prize is likely to occur, The electric accessory 39a may be switched. Alternatively, the electric accessory 39a may not be provided, and switching between a state in which a prize is more likely to occur and a state in which a prize is less likely to occur may be performed by the displacement of the second operating port 39 itself.

The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 47 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 47 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 47 faces the window panel 62 provided in the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further with the window panel 62. The distance between them is smaller than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 47.

The main display section 43 and the accessory display section 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 47. That is, the main display part 43 and the accessory display part 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the front of both of these display parts 43 and 44 is a game ball. It is prevented from falling.

On the main display portion 43, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each of the operation openings 38 and 39 is clearly shown by the display of a picture or the like.

The main display section 43 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a CRT or a dot matrix. Further, as the pattern displayed on the main display portion 43, there are a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors. The configuration that is displayed can be considered.

On the accessory display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 41 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 41 is displayed as the stop result of the variable display. It is specified by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 41 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state changes to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 42 is provided with a symbol display device 51 that variably displays (or variably or switches) a symbol, which is a type of symbol. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 51 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

A first holding light emitting portion 54 and a second holding light emitting portion 55, which correspond to the main display portion 43, are provided below the main display portion 43 in the decoration member 47. The first holding light emitting unit 54 has a plurality of light emitting units (more specifically, four) arranged side by side on the left and right, and the maximum number of game balls winning the first operating port 38 is held to a maximum of four. When the part 54 is turned on, the number of reserved items is displayed. The second hold light emitting unit 55 has a plurality of light emitting units (more specifically, four) arranged side by side on the left and right, and the maximum number of game balls winning the second operation port 39 is four, and the second hold light emitting unit 55 is held. When the part 55 is turned on, the number of holdings is displayed. Further, a third holding light emitting unit 56 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided below the accessory display unit 44 in the decorative member 47. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 41 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the third reserved light emitting unit 56. In addition, a part of or all of the hold light emitting units 54 to 56 may be displayed on a part of the symbol display device 51.

The accessory device 150 is in an open state on condition that the game ball enters the one of the operation ports 38, 39, and the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. When a game ball enters the accessory device 150 and the game ball enters a V winning opening provided in the accessory device 150, it is detected by a V winning sensor 192, which will be described later, and the jackpot is achieved.

Here, the configuration of the accessory device 150 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5A is a perspective view of the accessory device 150, FIG. 5B is a plan view schematically showing the structure of a passage provided in the accessory device 150, and FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a rotator unit 180 that constitutes the accessory device 150, and FIG. 8 is a plan view of the rotator unit 180.

The accessory device 150 is roughly composed of an accessory unit 160 and a rotating body unit 180. As shown in FIG. 6, the accessory unit 160 includes a base frame 161, and a flange 162 of the base frame 161 is screwed and fixed to the game board 24. The base frame 161 is vertically divided by a ball receiving plate 163 that extends in the front-rear direction, and an upper opening 164 and a lower opening 165 that penetrate the front and rear are formed.

A ceiling member 167 having a predetermined thickness is attached above the upper opening 164 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The variable display unit 42 is formed on the ceiling member 167, and the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is installed so as to face the front of the gaming machine.

A pair of opening/closing accessories 168 having the same thickness as the ceiling member 167 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper opening 164 in the base frame 161. A passage forming member 171 and a drive unit fixing plate 172 are provided on the back surface side of the base frame 161, and a pair of opening/closing accessory driving units 173 (electromagnetic solenoids) are attached to the back surface of the drive unit fixing plate 172. There is. One end of a link 176 provided through the passage forming member 171 and the drive part fixing plate 172 is connected to the opening/closing accessory driving part 173, and the other end of the link 176 is connected to the shaft part of the opening/closing accessory 168. It is connected. Therefore, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened by the driving of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173.

The opening operation will be described in detail. When the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited), the opening/closing accessory 168 stands up, and the respective tip portions thereof are close to the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. On the other hand, when the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited), each opening/closing accessory 168 opens outward, and a game ball is provided between the tip end of each opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167. A gap larger than one is created. With this configuration, each opening/closing accessory 168 is opened, and only when the accessory device 150 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the accessory device 150. Even when the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is not driven (excited) (when the opening/closing accessory 168 stands up), when the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven (excited). It is only necessary to enter the ball into the accessory device 150 more than when the open/close accessory 168 is open to the outside, and it is effective when the open/close accessory drive unit 173 is not driven (excited). It may be configured to be able to enter the object device 150. For example, when the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is driven, the gap between the tip of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the left and right ends of the ceiling member 167 is about one game ball, and the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is It is conceivable that the gap becomes larger than that when driven.

Further, the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is configured so as not to be visible from the front of the gaming machine due to the passage forming member 171 and the driving unit fixing plate 172. The opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is covered by the cover member 174 on the back side. There is.

A front frame 175 is attached to the edge of the lower opening 165 on the front surface of the base frame 161. The extension wall 175a formed on the upper portion of the front frame 175 extends above the ball receiving plate 163 of the base frame 161, and the front of the game ball that reaches the ball receiving plate 163 by the extension wall 175a. Jumping out to is regulated.

The passage forming member 171 is formed with a passage plate 177 extending in the front-rear direction and connected to the ball receiving plate 163, and further on the back side of the passage plate 177, a game ball passage 178 extending in the vertical direction is formed (FIG. 5(b)). Then, the passage plate 177 is inclined downward toward the game ball passage 178, and further narrowed toward the game ball passage 178, so that the game ball reaching the ball receiving plate 163 is a game ball. It is guided to the passage 178. The game ball guided to the game ball passage 178 flows down through the game ball passage 178. An entrance sensor 179 is provided on the entrance side of the game ball passage 178, and the game ball entering the accessory device 150 always and immediately passes through the entrance sensor 179. Thereby, the entry of the game ball into the accessory device 150 is detected. The entrance sensor 179 is composed of a well-known proximity sensor.

The rotary unit 180 is attached to the accessory unit 160 so as to be located below the passage forming member 171. As shown in FIG. 7, the rotating body unit 180 includes a guide passage forming member 181 and a discharge passage forming member 191.

The guide passage forming member 181 is formed with a recess 182 that is recessed downward at substantially the center thereof. The recess 182 has a circular shape in a plan view. An annular guide passage 183 is formed along the outer edge of the upper opening of the recess 182. The guide passage 183 is bilaterally symmetric, and is inclined so as to become lower as going from the center of the back side to the center of the front side. The front center of the guide passage 183 is located at the lower end portion of the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161. The center on the back side of the guide passage 183 is located vertically below the game ball passage 178 of the accessory unit 160. The passage wall 183a forming the center of the back side of the guide passage 183 is taller than the surrounding passage walls 183a, and a passage cover 184 extending horizontally is formed above the guide passage 183 on the back side. .. However, the passage cover 184 is formed with an inlet opening 184a, and in the plan view (see FIG. 8), the back side portion of the guide passage 183 is configured so that only the back side center is exposed. Since the entrance opening 184a overlaps with the exit of the game ball passage 178, the game ball flowing down through the game ball passage 178 surely reaches the center of the guide passage 183 on the back side.

A ball distribution portion 185 is formed in the center of the guide passage 183 on the back side. The ball distributing unit 185 has an inclined surface that inclines downward from the center thereof toward both left and right. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the guide passage 183 is distributed to either the left or the right. Then, it rolls along the inclination of the guide passage 183 and is guided to the front side of the guide passage 183. A lead-out portion 186 that is inclined toward the recess 182 is formed on the front side of the guide passage 183.

A V winning opening 182 a is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 182. The V winning opening 182a communicates with a V winning passage 191a formed in the discharging passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the V winning opening 182a is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a. In this case, a V winning sensor 192 is provided in the V winning passage 191a, and the game ball passing through the V winning passage 191a is detected by the V winning sensor 192.

Further, a side opening 182b is formed on the side surface of the recess 182. The removal opening 182b communicates with a removal passage 191b formed in the discharge passage forming member 191, and the game ball entering the removal opening 182b is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the removal passage 191b. In this case, a detachment sensor 193 is provided in the detachment passage 191b, and the game ball passing through the detachment passage 191b is detected by the detachment sensor 193. The V winning sensor 192 and the detachment sensor 193 are configured by known proximity sensors. The game balls discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 through the V winning passage 191a and the removal passage 191b are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via a discharge passage (not shown).

The rotary body drive unit 194 is attached to the discharge passage formation member 191 from the lower side, and the output shaft 194a extending in the vertical direction of the rotary body drive unit 194 includes the discharge passage formation member 191 and the guide passage formation member 181. Penetrates through. The rotating body 201 is fixed to the output shaft 194a. The rotary body drive unit 194 may be a stepping motor.

The rotating body 201 has a substantially disc shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the recess 182 of the guide passage forming member 181, and is located in the recess 182. Then, the rotating body 201 rotates counterclockwise as the rotating body drive unit 194 is driven. On the outer circumference of the rotating body 201, ten ball guide portions 202 that are recessed inward are formed, and these ball guide portions 202 are arranged at equal intervals. Of these, the nine ball guides 202 are bottomed exit guides 203, and one ball guide 202 is a bottomed V winning opening guide 204. The bottom surface of the outlet guide portion 203 is inclined so as to be lower toward the outside. Each ball guide portion 202 has a size such that one game ball enters, and a game ball led out from the lead-out portion 186 of the guide passage 183 enters one of the ball guide portions 202. In this case, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening guide portion 204 reaches the upper portion of the V winning opening 182a as the rotating body 201 rotates, and falls from the V winning opening 182a into the V winning passage 191a. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the outlet guide portion 203 reaches the side of the outlet 182b along with the rotation of the rotating body 201, and enters the passage 191b for detachment from the outlet 182b.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided to grasp the rotational position of the rotating body 201. The rotational position detection sensor 196 has a pair of arm portions 196a and 196b that face each other with a predetermined gap. One arm portion 196a is provided with a light emitting element, and the other arm portion 196b has a light emitting element. Light receiving elements are arranged at opposite positions. The rotational position detection sensor 196 is provided on the sensor substrate 197. The sensor substrate 197 drives the rotating body between the arm portions 196a and 196b of the rotational position detection sensor 196 (between the light emitting element and the light receiving element). The cut van 198 provided on the output shaft 194a of the portion 194 is fixed to the discharge passage forming member 191 so as to be positioned.

The cut van 198 has a substantially donut shape and rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 194a. However, the cutout portion 198a is formed so as to be discontinuous. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element of the rotational position detection sensor 196 is basically blocked by the cut van 198, and only when the cutout portion 198a passes between the arm portions 196a and 196b as the output shaft 194a rotates. Light reaches the light receiving element. Since the cutout portion 198a is formed corresponding to the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 on the outer circumference of the rotating body 201, it is possible to monitor whether or not the light receiving element detects light from the light emitting element. The rotation position of the rotating body 201 can be grasped. By the way, when the V winning opening guide portion 204 passes on the front side of the lead-out portion 186, the notch portion 198a passes between the arm portions 196a and 196b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on one of the left and right sides of the guide passage 183, more specifically, on the left guide passage 183, which is the side where the outlet 182b is formed. The first distribution member 300 is arranged above the removal opening 182b in the guide passage 183 as a bottom portion that constitutes a part of the floor portion of the guide passage 183. The 1st distribution member 300 is arrange|positioned rather than the removal opening 182b. The first distribution member 300 is connected to the first distribution driving unit 300a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the first distribution driving unit 300a is drive-controlled, whereby the floor of the guide passage 183 is formed. Of the first distribution member 300 and a distribution state in which the rear end of the first distribution member 300 rotates downward and is inclined downward toward the outlet 182b side. ..

With the above configuration, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not driven (not in the excited state) and the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distributed state, the guide passage 183 is moved to the left side. The game balls that have been distributed pass over the first distribution member 300 with the first distribution member 300 as the floor portion, and reach one of the ball guide portions 202 of the rotating body 201. On the other hand, the first distribution driving unit 300a is driven (excited state) and the first distribution member 300 enters the distribution state, so that the first distribution member 300 tilts toward the lower outlet 182b side. The game ball passing over the first distributing member 300 is guided to the outlet 182b (passage passage 191b) as it is without reaching the rotating body 201. Therefore, the V winning probability (probability of being detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the first distributing member 300.

Further, in the present embodiment, a warp passage 250 for directly guiding the game balls that have passed through the game ball passage 178 to the V winning passage 191a is provided. The warp passage 250 has a passage area 251 through which one game ball can pass, and the passage area 251 is formed by curving downward and rearward. More specifically, an opening (not shown) that opens rearward is formed in the passage wall 183a behind the ball distribution portion 185 in the guide passage 183, and the passage area 251 of the passage region 251 is formed in the opening. The inlet 252 is communicated. Further, on the upper side of the discharge passage forming member 191, a V guide passage 260 through which one game ball can pass is formed toward the V winning passage 191a, and the warp is provided at the rear end portion 261 of the V guide passage 260. The outlet portion 253 of the passage area 251 in the passage 250 is in communication. The V induction passage 260 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the V winning passage 191a, and the front end 262 of the V guiding passage 260 communicates with the V winning passage 191a.

With the above configuration, when the game ball that has reached the guide passage 183 is guided to the warp passage 250 side, it passes through the passage area 251 in the warp passage 250 and is guided to the V guide passage 260. Then, the game ball passes through the V induction passage 260, enters the V winning passage 191a, and is detected by the V winning sensor 192 (V winning).

Here, upstream of (in front of) the inlet portion 252 of the warp passage 250, the inflow of the game balls into the warp passage 250 is regulated (whether it is distributed to the warp passage 250 or to the left and right in the guide passage 183). A second distribution member 310 that can perform) is provided. The second distribution member 310 is connected to a second distribution driving unit 310a (electromagnetic solenoid), and the second distribution driving unit 310a is drive-controlled, whereby the inlet 252 of the warp passage 250 is connected. It is displaced to a non-distributed state arranged in the front and a distributed state arranged above it and not arranged in front of the inlet portion 252. That is, when the second distribution drive unit 310a is not driven (not in the excited state) and in the non-distributed state, the game ball cannot flow into the warp passage 250, and in the guide passage 183. It is distributed to the left and right. On the other hand, when the second distribution driving unit 310a is driven (excited state) and enters the distribution state, the game ball can flow into the warp passage 250 (rear), and in this case, the rotation by the rotating body 201. It is led out directly to the V winning passage 191a without passing the minute. That is, the V winning probability (the probability of being detected by the V winning sensor 192) changes depending on the state of the second distribution member 310.

In addition, the ball distribution unit 185 at the center on the back side of the guide passage 183 has a downward slope to the rear so that the game balls can be distributed not only to the left and right but also to the rear. However, when the second allocating member 310 is in the non-allocating state, the second allocating member 310 is arranged on the descending inclined surface, and it is in the non-allocating state. Nevertheless, the occurrence of an event in which the game ball is trying to be distributed to the down slope side and stays there is suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the period until the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the position (ball distribution unit 185) to be distributed by the second distribution member 310 is about 0.3 sec. The passage length is set so that In addition, the period until the gaming ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the position to be distributed by the first distribution member 300 (on the first distribution member 300) is about 0.5 sec. The passage length is set.

The game ball that has entered the accessory device 150 described above enters the game ball passage 178 by rolling on the ball receiving plate 163. In this case, the game ball is detected by the entrance sensor 179. The game ball that has flowed down the game ball passage 178 reaches the ball distributing portion 185 formed in the center of the back side of the guide passage 183. Then, on the condition that the second distributing member 310 arranged in the ball distributing portion 185 is in the non-distributive state, the second distributing member 310 is distributed to one of the left and right guiding passages 183. Then, it is guided to the lead-out portion 186 by rolling in the guide passage 183 on the divided side. The game ball guided to the lead-out portion 186 is led out into the recess 182 by rolling along the inclination of the lead-out portion 186. However, when the ball is distributed to the left side by the ball distribution unit 185, the condition that the first distribution member 300 is in the non-distributed state is a condition to be led to the recess 182 side. That is, the game ball guided to the left guide passage 183 may be led out to the recess 182 side or may be led out to the removal opening 182b as it is.

The rotating body 201 is always rotating at a constant speed in the recessed portion 182, and the game ball that has been guided out into the recessed portion 182 and entered the outlet guide portion 203 is guided to the outlet 182b. In this case, the game ball is detected by the detachment sensor 193. On the other hand, the game ball that has been led out into the recess 182 and entered the V winning opening guide portion 204 is guided to the V winning opening 182a. In this case, the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 192. Then, the jackpot state is generated by being detected by the V winning sensor 192.

When the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state when the game ball reaches the ball distribution unit 185, not only the guide passage 183 on either side, but also the game ball to the warp passage 250 side. Are distributed. Then, by being distributed to the warp passage 250 side, it is directly detected by the V winning sensor 192 without being distributed by the first distribution member 300 or the rotating body 201, and a big hit state occurs.

Since there is only one V winning hole guide part 204 out of the ten ball guiding parts 202, the game balls that have entered the recess 182 of the accessory device 150 have a probability of 1/10. Will enter. Further, when the game balls are detected by the V winning sensor 192 and the detachment sensor 193, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 71. Furthermore, the movement of the game ball on the rotary unit 180 can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the opening of the front frame 175 and the lower opening 165 of the base frame 161.

However, the number of ball guides 202, the number of V winning opening guides 204, etc. are not limited to the above, and for example, one V winning mouth guide 204 is provided for each of the six ball guides 202. It may be configured to win V with a probability of /6, or may be configured to win V with another probability.

The sensors 179, 192, 193, 196, etc., and the power lines and signal lines of the drive parts 173, 300a, 310a, 194, etc. in the accessory device 150 are relay terminal plates attached to the guide passage forming member 181. It is connected to 199. Then, these signal lines are bundled as a harness and connected to a main control device which will be described later, and the main control device performs detection of a ball entering and drive control of the drive unit. However, some or all of these may be configured to be performed on the side of the effect control device, which will be described later, which is the control device on the sub side.

In the symbol display device 51, a notification that the game ball has entered one of the operation ports 38, 39 and the accessory device 150 is in an open state, a notification when the game ball has entered the accessory device 150, Distribution ratios to both distribution members 300 and 310, notification of distribution results, notification of distribution status in the rotating body 201, notification of occurrence of jackpot by detecting game ball with V winning sensor 192, etc. In addition to the notification during the normal gaming state, it also notifies the round effect during the jackpot state. It should be noted that the contents of these effects may be such that the player can clearly understand the respective game situations.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted.

The main controller 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is housed in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 serving as a separation preventing means (or a connecting means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Further, since they are inseparably connected by the box connecting portions 85, it is necessary to break or partially cut the substrate box 83 when opening the internal space of the substrate box 83. A plurality of box joining portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for joining processing.

Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled in a non-releasable manner. However, by inserting the locking claws into the long holes that configure the box coupling portion 85, the box coupling portion 85 can be connected to the box base. It is designed to be permanently connected to the box cover. The merging process by the box merging unit 85 prevents illicit opening after the merging, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if illicit opening is performed. It is possible to perform the opening process again after the opening. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box connecting portion 85 in which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion 85 are connected. Cut off the connection part of and the connection part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling part 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 83 that the board has been opened illegally.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the board box 83 so as to project laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81. The coupling pieces 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a board box 83 and a mounting base. Join processing is performed between the two.

As a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal sticker is peeled off from the pasted part, the adhesive layer of the seal sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace thereof remains. Furthermore, an IC tag for transmitting a response wave containing identification information to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker, and when the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the above-mentioned response is given. The wave may not be transmitted.

The production control device 82 includes a production control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the production control board is a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be accommodated in 84.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and the payout mechanism unit 92 and the control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 protruding rearward and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. ing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game arcade are successively replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. And a dispensing device 96 for dispensing the ball. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is provided with a main power supply of, for example, AC 24 V, and a back pack substrate provided with a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game balls are insufficient in the tank 95, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and opening/closing execution mode, etc. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to the state). Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

The control device grouping unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power supply and firing control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply/launch control device 98 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppressing means as the board box 83 of the main controller 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout controller 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by housing a power supply and launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and further by the player. The control of the launch of the game ball is performed in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 60. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the status at the time of the power failure and can recover the status at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure It is like this.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

A main controller 81, a performance controller 82, and a display controller 100 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame as described above, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism unit including the payout device 96, the payout control device 97, the power supply and the firing control. And a device 98.

The main control device 81 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main game, and a power failure monitor board 115 that monitors the power supply. In the main control device 81, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening may be added to the substrate box that houses the main control substrate 111 or the like, or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening may be provided. .. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies that constitute the substrate box are inseparably connected and the structure of a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is an object to be adhered when peeling off. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off when left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is conceivable that an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box.

The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 112 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and each may be configured into an individual chip. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 112, the power failure monitoring board 115 and the payout controller 97 provided in the main controller 81 are connected. In this case, a power supply and a firing control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In addition to the first operation sensor 38a and the second operation sensor 39c that detect winning in both the operation openings 38 and 39, the various sensors include a general winning opening as a winning detection sensor that detects a prize in another entry area. There are provided a sensor 35a for detecting a winning of 35, a sensor 41a for detecting a winning of the through gate 41, and the like. Further, as various sensors, an entrance sensor 179, a V winning sensor 192, a detachment sensor 193, a rotational position detection sensor 196, and the like in the accessory device 150 are included. In the MPU 112, based on the detection results of these various sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196, the winning determination (the winning determination) to each of the winning portions and the position of the rotating body 201 are performed. To grasp. Further, in the MPU 112, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating opening 38 or the second operating opening 39.

To the output side of the MPU 112, the power failure monitoring board 115, the payout control device 97, the effect control device 82, etc. are connected. To the payout control device 97, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the winning determination to the winning-compatible winning portion.

Various commands for effects are output to the effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the production control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 112, various driving parts such as an electric accessory driving part 39b, an opening/closing accessory driving part 173, a first distribution driving part 300a, a second distribution driving part 310a, a rotating body driving part 194, etc. Are connected. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a prize is generated in any one of the operation ports 38 and 39, or when the mode is changed to the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the V prize sensor 192, the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 of the accessory device 150 is driven. Under the control, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed. Further, in these cases, the drive control of both the distribution drive units 300a and 310a and the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 194 are performed.

Further, when the winning/winning lottery based on the winning of the both operation ports 38 and 39 is performed, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112. Further, in the case of clearly indicating the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 39a, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply/launch control device 98, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V output from the power supply/launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls payout of prize balls or loan balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like are generated with necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply and firing control device 98 is provided with a power source for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power source for power interruption is mainly used. Electric power for storage is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply and the launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launching mechanism 53, and the game ball launching mechanism 53 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 24, a ball feeder for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 71 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34, and the game ball is supplied by a drive signal supplied from the power supply and the firing control device 98 to the solenoid. Is fired.

The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board 141 on which the MPU 142 is mounted. The MPU 142 includes a ROM 143 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 142 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 143 is executed. A RAM 144, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are built in.

The MPU 142 drives and controls the various light emitting units 54 to 56, 63 and the speaker unit 64 based on the command received from the main control device 81. Also, the command resulting from the analysis of these commands is transmitted to the display control device 100. Incidentally, the production control device 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 151 on which an MPU 152, which is an element in which a program ROM 153 and a work RAM 154 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 155, a character ROM 156, and a video RAM 157 are mounted. Equipped with.

The MPU 152 analyzes various commands received from the effect control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 155 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 155).

The program ROM 153 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 152 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage unit that does not require external power supply when holding stored information. The work RAM 154 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 152 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply when storing the stored information. Is.

The VDP 155 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 155 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated for drawing processing. The VDP 155 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 152, the video RAM 157 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 157 from the character ROM 156 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

The character ROM 156 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 51. The character ROM 156 holds bit map format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

The video RAM 157 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display content of the symbol display device 51 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 157.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery in MPU 112 of main controller 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information at the time of playing a game, and performs jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 51, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, a jackpot random number counter C1 used in a lottery for jackpot occurrence, and a jackpot used in determining a jackpot type such as whether to open/close the opening/closing accessory 168. A type counter C2, and an open type counter CS for setting a waiting period from the winning to the open state when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened based on the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39. The random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not to bring the electric accessory 39a of the second operation port 39 into the electric accessory open state is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, CS, C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is acquired information storage when a winning is generated in the first operating port 38 or the second operating port 39. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as a means.

The reserved ball storage area 114b includes a reserved area RE including a first result display reserved area Ra and a second result display reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb respectively include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and a lottery counter is provided in accordance with the winning history of the first working opening 38 or the second working opening 39. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS stored in the use buffer 114a is stored in any of the areas as suspension information. The pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the winning in the first working opening 38 or the second working opening 39 occurs successively a plurality of times, the first area→the second area→the third area→ Each numerical value information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area. Since each of the four areas is provided in this manner, the winning history of the game balls to the first operating opening 38 or the second operating opening 39 is stored up to four, respectively. In addition, a total reserve number storage area is provided in the reserve ball storage area 114b, and the total number of reserves storage area holds and stores the winning history for the first operating opening 38 or the second operating opening 39. The information for specifying is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display portion 43 is started, and the execution area AE at the start of one game time. Based on the various numerical information stored in, the judgment of win/fail is made.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 99). The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 38 or the second operating opening 39. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first working opening 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 is stored when the game ball wins the second working opening 39. It is stored in the display area reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a result table (game result information group) in the result table storage area 113a serving as a winning/losing information group storage unit in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the result table will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11A, in the result table, as a game result, a deviation result, a direct hit result, and a normal opening result are set. The normal opening result is a game result in which the opening/closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is brought into an open state based on the winning of the operation openings 38, 39. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened once when a prize is generated in the first operating port 38, and is opened twice when a prize is generated in the second operating port 39. Is set to be. The disengagement result is a result in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is not in the open state even when a winning is made in the operation ports 38, 39. In this case, it is not possible to make a prize in the accessory device 150, and a transition to the big hit state (opening/closing execution mode) cannot be expected. The direct hit result is a result of shifting to the big hit state (opening/closing execution mode) only when a win is generated in the operation ports 38 and 39, and even if a prize is not awarded to the accessory device 150, a V prize is not generated. , As described above, the jackpot state is entered.

Of the jackpot random number counter C1 (0 to 99), the number of random number values that are out-of-range results is one, the number of random number values that is a direct hit result is one, and the others are normally open results. It is the corresponding value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of opening/closing accessories 168 corresponding to the operating ports 38, 39 is opened with a probability of 98/100 based on the winning of the operating ports 38, 39, and 1/100 There is a probability that the opening/closing accessory 168 will not be opened, but a transition to the opening/closing execution mode will be performed without passing the V prize, and there is a 1/100 probability that the opening/closing accessory 168 will not be opened or the opening/closing execution mode is changed. There is no migration.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the direct hit result and the misalignment result are not provided. However, by including these results, the diversification of the game is achieved, and particularly when the direct hit result is provided, the game in which the prize is not frequently generated in the accessory device 150 due to the nail adjustment or the like. It is possible to expect a big hit state even with a table, and even with such a game table, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing motivation for the game.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented one by one in a range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 38 or the second operating opening 39. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first working opening 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 is stored when the game ball wins the second working opening 39. It is stored in the display area reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number for setting the type of the jackpot result is stored as a type table (game type information group) in the various table storage area 113d as the hit/miss information group storage means in the ROM 113.

Here, the contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11B, 16R (round) continuation mode and continuation rate variation mode are set in the type table as the types of jackpot results. The 16R continuation mode indicates a mode in which a round game is executed 16 times, and the continuation rate variation mode indicates a mode in which the continuation rate to the next round game varies in a round game.

Here, the round game is (1) that the opening/closing accessory 168 has been opened a predetermined maximum number of times, and (2) the total winning number of game balls to the accessory device 150 is predetermined. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions is reached. By the way, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened and closed 19 times in one round game, and the upper limit winning number of one round game is set to 9.

The maximum number of times the round game is played in each jackpot type is predetermined, and specifically, the maximum round game is set to 16 times regardless of the jackpot result of any mode. In this case, in the 16R continuation mode, 16 round games are set to be continued unconditionally. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, the round game is set to continue when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied. The continuation condition is that the game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the round game, and the game ball wins V.

The open type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. The release type counter CS is updated regularly. However, the update timing is set to be different from that of the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit type counter C2. Therefore, it becomes difficult to carry out fraudulent acts of reading the update timing of each counter value by some method. Like the other counters C1 and C2, the updated opening type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 38 or the second operating opening 39. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first working opening 38, and the second result of the RAM 114 is stored when the game ball wins the second working opening 39. It is stored in the display area reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that sets the waiting time (opening timing) from winning the prize to the operating ports 38, 39 to opening the opening/closing accessory 168 is stored in the opening timing table storage area 113c as the standby information group storage means in the ROM 113. It is stored as (waiting period information group).

Here, the contents of the release timing table will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11C, as the opening timing, a plurality of types of waiting time (waiting period) from the winning timing to the operation ports 38 and 39 (or the closing timing of the previous opening/closing accessory 168) are set. ing. More specifically, 20 types of waiting times are set in increments of 0.1 sec from 0.5 sec to 2.4 sec. Then, the interval (0.1 sec) between these respective times is set to be shorter than the game cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec cycle), and the prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 by so-called stop hitting or the like. It has become difficult to intentionally change (increase) the probability.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41.

Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 39a is controlled to be in the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 190, the electric accessory 39a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=191 to 250, the electric accessory 39a is not controlled to the open state.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 39a is set to be the same regardless of the game state. That is, it is easy to win in the open lottery of the electric accessory 39a, or a state in which the open time or the number of times of opening when the win is successful is large (so-called high-frequency support mode), or the win probability in the open lottery is lower than that or open when the win No mode such as a state where the time or the number of releases is small (so-called low frequency support mode) is not provided. If you have a configuration with these modes, the range of increase and decrease of the number of balls can be increased, so it is possible to improve the interest, but in order to adjust the number of balls in the high frequency support mode, There may be a situation in which it is necessary to adopt a specification such that the winning frequency to both the operation ports 38 and 39 is set low. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, it is possible that a prize is less likely to be generated in the operating ports 38 and 39, and the motivation for the game may be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by setting the opening mode of the electric accessory 39a regardless of the game state, even in the normal game state, it is possible to expect a win to the operating ports 38, 39 to some extent. It is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed to advance the game in the MPU 112 in the main control unit 81 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the MPU 112 executes the main processing started when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing started by the input of the power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). A description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is activated by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196 are read, and the states of these various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 41a, 179, 192, 193, 196 are read. Execute the process of determining and saving the detection information. In addition, when the various detection sensors 38a, 39c, 35a, 179 corresponding to the generation of prize balls detect the winning of the game balls, the prize for instructing the payout controller 97 to pay the prize balls. Set the sphere command. For example, when the entrance sensor 179 detects a prize to the accessory device 150, a prize ball command for instructing the corresponding 15 prize balls is set. In a succeeding step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In a succeeding step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 114.

In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning in the through gate 41 is executed. In the through winning process, when the winning to the through gate 41 is generated, the number of stored accessory holdings stored in the electric hand holding area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4"). Under the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area 114c. Moreover, the process for lighting the 3rd hold|maintenance light emission part 56 corresponding to the number of accessory holding storages is performed with respect to effect control device 82.

After that, after the winning process for the operating port is executed in step S105, the timer interrupt process is ended. In the winning process for the operating port, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in one of the operating ports 38 and 39, and when it is determined that the winning is achieved, numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like at that time. Is obtained and the numerical value information is stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a.

Specifically, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 and 14.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first operating port 38 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first operating port 38. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first operating opening 38, in step S202, the payout control device 97 sets a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls. In a succeeding step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won in the first operating opening 38. In step S204, the value stored in the number-of-holds storage area of the first result display section holding area Ra is read out, and the number of starting-hold storage RaN stored in the first result display section holding area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the first startup pending storage number RaN). In a succeeding step S205, a process of setting the opening number of the opening/closing accessory 168 to 1 is executed. Specifically, a process of setting "1" to the opening number counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. After that, in step S206, an information acquisition process for storing the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the open type counter CS is performed, and the winning process is ended.

When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the first operating port 38, in step S207 it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second operating port 39 (starting winning). It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to. When it is determined that the game ball has won the second operation opening 39, a prize ball command for paying out seven game balls is set in the payout control device 97 in step S208. In a succeeding step S209, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won in the second operating port 39. In step S210, the value stored in the reservation number storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb is read out, and the start reservation storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as the second start pending storage number RbN). In a succeeding step S211, a process of setting the opening number of the opening/closing accessory 168 to 2 is executed. Specifically, the process of setting "2" to the above-mentioned opening counter is executed. Even if the number of times of opening is set in the processing of step S205 or step S211, the opening/closing accessory 168 may not be opened depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 as described above. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S206, and the main winning process is ended.

On the other hand, if both steps S201 and S207 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won in any of the first working opening 38 and the second working opening 39, the main winning process is ended.

The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S208 is transmitted to the payout controller 97 in an external output process S401 of a normal process described later.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S206 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the information acquisition process, first in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting pending memories set in step S204 or step S210 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). judge. If the number N of start-up pending storages is the upper limit value, this information acquisition processing is ended as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the number N of start-up pending storages of the corresponding result display section holding area is determined in step S302. While incrementing by 1, the value stored in the total reserved number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is also incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit type counter C2 updated in the above step S103, and the open type counter CS updated in the normal process described later are set in the corresponding result display holding area free space. The data is stored in the first storage area of the storage area areas, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages incremented by 1 in step S302.

That is, when the number of storages for starting suspension RaN for the first working port is set, the respective values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS are set to the holding area Ra for the first working port. Is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, in the holding area Ra corresponding to the number of startup holding storages RaN for the first working opening incremented by 1 in step S302.

When the number RbN of starting pending storage for the second working port is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the opening type counter CS are set to the holding area Rb for the second working port. Is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas, that is, in the holding area Rb corresponding to the number RbN of starting holding storages for the second working opening incremented by 1 in step S302. After executing the processing of step S304, the information acquisition processing ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal process, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If the effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

Next, in step S402, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In a succeeding step S403, a game control process for advancing the game is executed. In this game control process, drive control of each drive unit of the accessory device 150 based on winning in the operation ports 38, 39 is performed.

After executing the game control process of step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. By this game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open/close execution mode. Details of the game control process of step S403 and the game state transition process of step S404 will be described later.

In a succeeding step S405, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric auditors product 39a provided in the second operation port 39 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release of whether or not the electric role 39a is opened using the numerical information acquired from the electric role open counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 114c of the RAM 114. The lottery is performed, and when the electric-role open state wins, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 39a is executed. Further, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role open lottery.

Then, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In subsequent step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the open type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. Further, in step S409, the open type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the open type counter CS is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the release type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process changes rather than being constant. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and in the same manner. The open type counter CS can also be updated at random.
<Game control processing>
Next, the game control process of step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

In the game control process, first in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode flag (open/close execution state information) is stored (stored) in the open/close execution mode flag storage area (open/close execution state information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. To do. The open/close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is changed to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is erased when the open/close execution mode is also ended in the game state transition process.

When in the open/close execution mode, this game control process is executed without executing any of the processes of step S502 and thereafter, that is, the game start process of steps S503 to S506 and the game progress process of steps S507 to S509. To finish. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the game starts regardless of whether or not a prize has been paid to the operating ports 38, 39 (the accessory device triggered by the winning of the operating ports 38, 38). 150 is not opened).

If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether the accessory device 150 is in the control state. Whether or not it is in the control state includes the period of the opening/closing operation of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the operation openings 38, 39. Whether or not it is in the control state is determined to be in the control state on the condition that the accessory control flag is stored in the accessory control flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. To do. The above-described accessory control flag is stored when the game result based on the winning of the operation openings 38, 39 is the opening result (in the present embodiment, the normal opening result), and the accessory device 150 based on the result is stored. It is erased at the end of the operation (including the waiting period after closing).

If the accessory device 150 is not in the control state, the process proceeds to the game starting process of steps S503 to S506. In the game starting process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether the common hold number CRN is "0". When the common pending number CRN is “0”, it means that the starting pending storage numbers RaN and RbN are “0” for both the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39. Therefore, the game control process is ended as it is. When the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb is set for variable display in step S504. Data setting processing is executed, and further, in step S505, a winning/judging judgment processing for judging the game result of the data set in the data setting processing is executed, and in step S506, the accessory device 150 is controlled. After executing the control start processing to be started, this game control processing is ended.

Here, the data setting process of step S504, the hit determination process of step S505, and the control start process of step S506 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN held in the second result display hold area Rb is “0”. When the second start pending storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S607 is executed, and when the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0". Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more, as already described. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN is “0”, and when it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display section BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display holding area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether the first start pending storage number RaN is 1 or more. I chose As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display section holding area Ra and the second result display section holding area Rb, the second result display section corresponding to the second operation port 39 is used. The holding information stored in the holding area Rb is prioritized.

In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S602, the first startup hold storage number RaN of the first result display hold area Ra is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S603, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, in step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

Then, in step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and at the same time, the second area→the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S606, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is set in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag specifies whether the object of the present success/failure determination corresponds to the holding information of the first result display unit holding area Ra or the second result display unit holding area Rb. Information.

In a succeeding step S607, a shift command (shift occurrence information) which is information for causing the effect control device 82 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first result display holding area Ra, that is, the first operating port 38 A shift-time command including information on the correspondence is selected, and the selected shift-time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Then, this data setting process is completed.

The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first holding light emitting unit 54 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S608, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display hold area Rb is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S609, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. Then, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and at the same time, the second area→the first area, The data in each area is shifted in the order of 3 area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area, and so on.

In the following step S612, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If not stored, the second result display unit flag is stored, and if stored, that state is maintained.

In a succeeding step S613, a shift command (shift occurrence information) which is information for causing the effect control device 82 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, information that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the second result display holding area Rb, that is, the second operating port 39. A shift time command including information on what is being done is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Then, this data setting process is completed.

The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes processing for changing the display on the second hold light emitting unit 55 based on the received shift time command in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold pieces.

Next, the success/failure determination processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is a direct hit result by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the current execution area AE and the result table of the ROM 113. If it is a direct hit result, the process proceeds to step S702, and a process of storing the V winning flag in the various flag storage area 114e is executed. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to recognize the occurrence of the open execution mode.

In a succeeding step S703, the direct hit command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S703, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the direct hit is executed. Then, the true/false determination process ends.

The direct hit command set in step S703 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes processing for starting effect of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received direct hit command.

If the direct hit result is not obtained in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether or not the game result of this time is a deviation result by referring to the data (big hit random number counter C1) shifted to the current execution area AE and the result table of the ROM 113. In the case of the disengagement result, the process proceeds to step S705, and the value set in the opening number counter in step S205 or step S211 in the above-described winning opening process for the working opening (FIG. 13) is cleared to "0".

Then, in step S706, the disengagement command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. Further, in step S706, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the removal result is executed. Then, the true/false determination process ends.

The disengagement command set in step S706 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is not in the open state, based on the received disconnection command.

If it is not the deviation result in step S704, the normal opening command is set as the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S707. In step S704, a process of switching the display of the main display unit 43 to the display corresponding to the normal opening result is executed. Then, the true/false determination process ends.

The normal release command set in step S707 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the accessory device 150 is in the open state, based on the received normal open command.

That is, in the present embodiment, the result of the winning/non-judgment determination (game result) is immediately notified based on the winning of the operation openings 38, 39.

Next, the control start processing of step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the control start process, first, in step S801, a process of grasping the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened is executed by referring to the number-of-opens counter in the RAM 114. In the following step S802, opening/closing timing setting processing is executed. In the opening/closing timing setting process, of the data shifted to the execution area AE in the data setting process (FIG. 17), data relating to the opening timing, that is, the value of the opening type counter CS and the opening timing table stored in the ROM 113. With reference to, the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 this time is set. Specifically, a numerical value corresponding to how many seconds after this process the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened (whether to start the driving control of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173) is read from the opening timing table and stored in the RAM 114. Inputs are made to a standby counter provided in various counter areas 114d. This standby counter is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp that it is the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168.

In the following step S803, the first distribution setting process is executed. In the first apportionment setting process, the first apportioning member 300 is placed in the apportionment state at the timing when a predetermined first period (0.0 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. The first distributing member 300 is set to be in the non-distributive state at a timing when a predetermined second period (1.5 sec) has elapsed from that time.

Then, in step S804, the second distribution setting process is executed, and then the control start process is ended. In the second distribution setting process, the second distribution member 310 is set to the distribution state at the timing when a predetermined third period (1.8 sec) has elapsed from the opening timing set in step S802. The second allocating member 310 is set to be in the non-allocating state at the timing when a predetermined fourth period (0.1 sec) has elapsed from that time.

These timings can be grasped by the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Specifically, in steps S803 and S804, first, the value corresponding to the first and third periods (the value corresponding to the timing of displacing from the non-distributed state to the distributed state) is stored in the corresponding distribution counter. input. These distribution counters are updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and become a predetermined value (for example, "0"), so that the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced (non-distributed state→distributed state) timing. Can be understood. Then, in the distribution process (FIG. 21) described below, the displacement of the distribution members 300 and 310 (drive control of the drive units 300a and 310a) is performed, and the value corresponding to the period for maintaining the distribution state is It is input to the distribution counter. After that, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it becomes possible to grasp the timing of the displacement (distributed state→non-distributed state) again.

That is, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the first distribution member 300 and the second distribution member 310 are displaced is uniquely determined, and more specifically, the opening/closing accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is opened. The period from the timing until the distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced is defined.

Regarding the first to fourth periods, the period during which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state is a period during which the game balls that enter the accessory device 150 can reach the distribution members 300 and 310. Is set.

Next, a game progressing process in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described. As described above, the game progression process is a process performed when it is determined in step S502 that the accessory device 150 is in the control state. That is, when the control state is in effect in step S502, the in-control process is executed in step S507, the distribution process is executed in step S508, and the winning process is executed in subsequent step S509. , The game control process ends.

First, the process during control in step S507 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S901, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168. In this determination, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the opening timing by referring to the value of the standby counter set in step S802. If it is the opening timing in step S901, the opening control process is executed in step S902. In this process, the opening/closing accessory product 168 is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing accessory product 168 to the open state. In step S902, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current open period (uniformly 2 sec in the present embodiment) to the open period counter provided in each counter area 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The opening period counter is updated (subtracted) in a predetermined cycle, and when it becomes a predetermined value (for example, “0”), it is possible to grasp that it is the closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168.

Then, in a succeeding step S903, a process of subtracting "1" from the release number counter of the RAM 114 is executed, and then the present control process is ended.

If it is not the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether it is the closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168. In this process, it is possible to confirm whether or not it is the closing timing by referring to the value of the opening period counter input in step S902. If it is the closing timing in step S904, the closing control process is executed in step S905. In this processing, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is ended, and thus the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state.

In a succeeding step S906, it is determined whether or not the remaining opening number is “0” by referring to the opening number counter of the RAM 114. If the value is "0", control end processing is executed in step S907. In this process, a process for ending the control of the accessory device 150 with respect to one hold information is performed. Specifically, the presence/absence of an error in each of the drive units 173, 300a, 310a, 194 is confirmed, and the process of returning to the initial position is performed. In a succeeding step S908, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, the process during control is ended.

The control end command set in step S908 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The effect control device 82 executes a process for notifying that the control of the accessory device 150 will end, based on the received control end command.

If the number of releases is not "0" in step S906, a standby period setting process is executed in step S909. In the waiting period setting process, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the present waiting period (uniformly 1 sec in this embodiment) to the waiting period counter of the RAM 114 is executed.

If it is not the closing timing in step S904, after executing the processing of step S908 or after executing the processing of step S909, the present control processing ends.

Next, the distribution process of step S508 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300. This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the first distribution counter of the RAM 114 as described above. Then, if it is the displacement timing, the first distribution control process is executed in step S1002. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the first distribution driving unit 300a is grasped, and if the driving state is in the driving state, the driving is terminated, and the first distribution member 300 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. In addition, when the first distribution driving unit 300a is not in the driving state, driving is started to displace the first distribution member 300 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, the value corresponding to the second period is input to the first distribution counter.

In step S1002, if the control this time corresponds to opening twice (opening based on winning in the second operation port 39), similar to the process of step S803, from the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, The first allocating member 300 is placed in the allocating state at the timing when a predetermined first period elapses, and the first allocating member 300 is not distributed at the timing when a predetermined second period elapses therefrom. Set to state. The period from the displacement of the first distribution member 300 from the distribution state to the non-distribution state to the second opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is also referred to as a fifth period. In addition, in the present embodiment, the fifth period is set to 1.0 sec.

If it is not the displacement timing of the first distributing member 300 in step S1001, or after the process of step S1002 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not it is the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310. This determination can be confirmed by referring to the value of the second distribution counter of the RAM 114, as described above. Then, if it is the displacement timing, the second allocation control process is executed in step S1004. In this process, a process of changing the drive state of the second distribution drive unit 310a is performed. Specifically, the driving state of the second distribution driving unit 310a is grasped, and if it is in the driving state, the driving is ended, and the second distribution member 310 is changed from the distribution state to the non-distribution state. Displace. In addition, when the second distribution driving unit 310a is not in the driving state, driving is started to displace the second distribution member 310 from the non-distribution state to the distribution state. When the distribution state is set, the value corresponding to the fourth period is input to the first distribution counter.

In step S1004, if the control this time corresponds to opening twice (opening based on winning in the second operation port 39), similar to the process of step S804, from the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, The second distribution member 310 is set to the distribution state at the timing when the predetermined third period has elapsed, and the second distribution member 310 is not distributed at the timing when the predetermined fourth period has elapsed from that. Set to state. The period from the displacement of the second distributing member 310 from the distributed state to the non-distributed state until the second opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is also referred to as a sixth period. In the present embodiment, this sixth period is set to 0.6 sec.

When it is not the displacement timing of the second distribution member 310 in step S1003, or after the processing of step S1004 is executed, the main distribution processing is ended.

Next, the winning process of step S509 in the game control process (FIG. 16) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, the detection signal from the entrance sensor 179 is grasped and it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the accessory device 150. If the player has won the prize, in step S1102, the prize winning command in the accessory is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After that, the process during control is ended.

The prize winning command in the accessory set in step S1102 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In the effect control device 82, based on the received prize winning command, the notification that the winning in the bonus device 150 has occurred (notification for paying attention to the action of the game ball in the bonus device 150). Perform the processing for.

If the entrance sensor 179 is not in the detected state in step S1101 (including winning), or after executing the process of step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, a detection signal from the V winning sensor 192 is grasped to determine whether or not a V winning has occurred. When the V winning is generated, in step S1104, the V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114 to store that the jackpot state (transition to the opening/closing execution mode) is generated. Then, in step S1105, a control end process is executed, and in step S1106, a control end command is set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82.

The process of step S1105 is the same as the process of step S907. The control end command set in the process of step S1106 may be the same as the command of step S908, or may include information indicating that a V winning has occurred. Even if it is the same as the command in step S908, a command for that is output at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, so that the effect control device 82 side can grasp the shift to the opening/closing execution mode and suppress an increase in the number of commands. It is possible. On the other hand, if the command in step S1106 includes information indicating that a V prize has been generated, the effect can be quickly grasped by the effect control device 82 side, and an effect that celebrates the V prize can be achieved. It becomes possible to carry out at a timing closer to the V winning timing of the game ball.

When the V winning is not detected in step S1103 or after the process of step S1106 is executed, the main winning process is ended.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S404 in the normal processing (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the game result this time corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the RAM 114. If the V winning flag is not stored, the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

If the V winning flag is stored, the opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed in step S1203. In the start process, an opening waiting time (starting waiting period) for waiting without opening the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 for opening in the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for opening, which is stored in advance in the ROM 113, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is executed.

In subsequent step S1204, a type determination process for determining the type of the current open/close execution mode is executed. Specifically, of the pending information stored in the execution area AE this time, the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the type of the opening/closing execution mode of this time is referred to by the 16R continuation mode by referring to the type table of the ROM 113. Or the continuation rate variation mode.

In the following step S1205, it is determined based on the processing result of step S1204 whether the current open/close execution mode is the 16R continuous mode. In the 16R continuation mode, the continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1206. The continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to know that the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode.

If the 16R continuous mode is not set in step S1205, or after the process of step S1206 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, "15" is set in the first round counter RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and "19" is set in the second round counter RC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d. .. The first round counter RC1 is a counter for counting the number of round games in one opening/closing execution mode, and the second round counter RC2 counts the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened in one round game. It is a counter for doing.

After executing the process of step S1207, an opening command is set in step S1208. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This opening command includes information on whether the mode is the 16R continuous mode or the continuous rate changing mode. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect content is executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. In the display control device 100, based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, display control of the symbol display device 51 is performed so that a display (for example, a moving image display) corresponding to the present opening/closing execution mode is performed.

In a succeeding step S1209, after executing the external signal setting process, the game state transition process is ended. In the external signal setting processing, the signal output state of the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. You can understand what you have done.

On the other hand, if it is in the open/close execution mode, an affirmative decision is made in step S1201 and the operation proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition processing is ended as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the opening/closing process is executed in step S1211.

Here, the opening/closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether the opening/closing accessory 168 is being opened. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173. When the opening/closing accessory 168 is not being opened, it is determined in step S1302 whether the value of the first round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S1303, the timers provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 are set. It is determined whether the value of the counter T is "0".

When the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the main opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the setting process for each round is executed.

Regarding the setting process of each round, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the activation timing of the setting process this time is the start timing of each round. Specifically, when the second round counter RC2 is “0”, it is determined that it is the start timing of each round. If it is not the start timing, this setting process is ended as it is.

In a succeeding step S1402, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is stored in the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode this time is the 16R continuation mode. If the continuation flag is not stored and the open/close execution mode this time is the continuation rate variation mode, the round number grasping process is executed in step S1403. In this process, the number of round games in the open/close execution mode for the round set in the current round setting process is grasped by referring to the value of the first round counter RC1. Then, in step S1404, the round pattern table stored in the various table storage area 113d of the ROM 113 is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 27, the round pattern table defines the open/close pattern for each round in one open/close execution mode. A plurality of opening/closing patterns of the opening/closing accessory 168 for each round are set, and an opening/closing pattern A, an opening/closing pattern B, and an opening/closing pattern C are set.

As described above, in the 16R continuation mode, the round game continues unconditionally up to the 16th round. On the other hand, in the continuation rate variation mode, the next round is continued when the continuation condition is satisfied. And this continuation condition is that the game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the round game, and that game ball wins V.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 in each round is made different to change the continuation rate of each round in the continuation rate change mode. More specifically, the opening/closing pattern A is easier to continue than B and C. When the open/close pattern B and the open/close pattern C are compared, the probability of V winning may be different depending on the entering timing of the game ball.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28, in the open/close pattern table stored in the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, the open/close mode may differ depending on how many times the open/close patterns A to C of each round are opened. Is set to.

For example, in the opening/closing pattern A, during the opening of 19 times in one round game, at the opening times of the first to 16th times (RC2=1 to 16), it is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball ( (3 times) Open for 1.8 sec and then close for 0.5 sec (also referred to as open/close pattern A1). In addition, in the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19), the opening is performed for 1.0 sec and then the closing is performed for 4.0 sec (also referred to as an opening/closing pattern A2). That is, in the case of A1, a prize to the accessory device 150 is relatively likely to occur in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of A2, it is possible to occur, but it is less likely to occur than A1.

Regarding the opening/closing pattern B, the first to tenth (RC2=1 to 10) times of opening are opened for 0.2 sec and then closed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as opening/closing pattern B1). From the 11th time to the 13th time (RC2=11 to 13), the opening is performed for 1.0 sec and then the closing is performed for 1.3 sec (also referred to as an opening/closing pattern B2). The 14th to 16th times (RC2=14 to 16) are the same as the opening/closing pattern B1. In the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19), the opening is performed for 0.2 sec and then the closing is performed for 4.8 sec (also referred to as an opening/closing pattern B3). That is, in the case of B1 and B3, a prize is hardly generated in the accessory device 150 in relation to the firing cycle, and in the case of B2, a prize may be generated at a level substantially equal to that of A2.

Regarding the opening/closing pattern C, at the opening times of the first to 16th times (RC2=1 to 16), the opening is performed for 0.2 sec and then the closing is performed for 2.1 sec (also referred to as the opening/closing pattern C1). The opening/closing pattern C1 is the same opening/closing pattern as the opening/closing pattern B1. From the 17th time to the 19th time (RC2=17 to 19), the opening is performed for 1.0 sec and then the closing is performed for 4.0 sec (also referred to as an opening/closing pattern C2). The opening/closing pattern C2 is an opening/closing pattern similar to the opening/closing pattern A1. That is, in the case of C1, there is almost no winning in the accessory device 150, and in the case of C2, it is similar to A2.

In this way, the opening/closing pattern is different depending on the opening/closing patterns A to C set in each round. Even in the same round, the opening/closing mode differs depending on how many times the opening/closing is performed.

On the other hand, regarding the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, the operation mode is the same in all rounds.

Specifically, with respect to the first distribution member 300, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened at the opening times of the first to the tenth (RC2=1 to 10) regardless of the opening/closing patterns A to C. After the period TA1 (0.0 sec) from the start, the state is changed to the distribution state, after the period TA2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement, the state is changed to the non-distribution state, and thereafter, the state is not maintained for the period TA3 (1.3 sec). The distribution state is maintained (also referred to as operation pattern VA1). The eleventh to sixteenth times (RC2=11 to 16) are displaced to the distribution state after a period TA4 (0.0 sec) from the opening start of the opening/closing accessory 168, and not moved after a period TA5 (1.0 sec) from the displacement. After being displaced to the distributed state, the non-distributed state is maintained for TA6 (1.3 sec) (also referred to as operation pattern VA2). From the 17th time to the 19th time (RC2=17 to 19), there is no displacement in the non-distributed state (also referred to as operation pattern VA3).

Regarding the second distribution member 310, in any of the opening/closing patterns A to C, the first distribution to the 16th (RC2=1 to 16) opening times do not displace in the non-distributed state (operation pattern). Also called VB1). From the 17th time to the 19th time (RC2=17 to 19), it is displaced to the distribution state after a period TB1 (1.0 sec) from the opening start of the opening/closing accessory 168, and is not returned after a period TB2 (0.1 sec) from the displacement. After being displaced to the distributed state, the non-distributed state is maintained over TB3 (3.9 seconds) (also referred to as an operation pattern VB2).

Here, in each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, the total operation period of the opening time and the closing time at each opening/closing (RC2) is predetermined. That is, in any opening/closing pattern, the operation period at the time of opening/closing the first to 16th times (RC2=1 to 16) is the first operation period (2.3 sec), and the 17th to 19th times (RC2= The operation period at the time of opening and closing 17 to 19) is the second operation period (5.0 sec).

Further, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the opening/closing execution mode do not change in relation to the opening/closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 of the opening and closing accessory 168. That is, in any opening/closing pattern, the first distribution member 300 operates in the operation pattern of VA1 during the first to tenth opening (RC2=1 to 10), and the eleventh to sixteenth opening (RC2= The operation pattern of VA2 is performed at the time of opening and closing 11 to 16), and the operation pattern of VA3 is performed at the time of opening and closing the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19). Further, the second distribution member 310 operates according to the operation pattern of VB1 at the opening and closing of the first to 16th times (RC2=1 to 16), and the opening and closing of VB2 at the opening and closing of the 17th to 19th times (RC2=17 to 19). Operates according to the operation pattern.

In other words, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is 23.0 seconds (0 sec to 23.0 sec, 2.3 sec×10 times) after the start of one round game (when the round game is first opened). It switches from VA1 to VA2, and switches from VA2 to VA3 36.8 seconds after the start of the same round game (23.0 seconds to 36.8 seconds, 23.0 seconds + 2.3 seconds x 6 times). Then, the operation of VA3 continues until after 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec+5.0 sec×3 times).

In addition, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is VB1 36.8 seconds (0 sec to 36.8 sec, 2.3 sec×16 times) after the start of one round game (when the round game is first opened). To VB2, and the operation of VB2 continues until after 51.8 sec (36.8 sec to 51.8 sec, 36.8 sec+5.0 sec×3 times).

That is, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniquely determined in each round.

The relationship between each opening/closing pattern A to C and the operation pattern of each distributing member will be described in more detail. If the opening/closing pattern A is A1, (ARC2=1 to 16), the prize to the accessory device 150 is won. It is relatively easy to occur, and moreover, V wins are likely to occur during VA1 (RC2=1 to 10) (hard to be distributed to the outside). On the other hand, even during A1 (RC2=1 to 16), VA2 (RC2=11 to 16) is less likely to be a V prize than VA1 (easy to be distributed to the outside). Note that the distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed during this A1 (VB1). In the opening/closing pattern A, when A2 is reached (RC2=17 to 19), winnings in the accessory device 150 are less likely to occur than in A1, but the first distribution member 300 does not distribute to the outside. (VA3), and the distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, in the case of the round of the opening/closing pattern A, there is a high expectation that the V winning will occur in any period (RC2=1 to 19), and the possibility of continuing the round is high.

In the case of the opening/closing pattern B, during B1 (RC2=1 to 10), winnings to the accessory device 150 hardly occur, but if winnings occur, the first distribution member 300 transfers the winnings to the outside. It is hard to be divided (VA1). When it becomes B2 (RC2=11 to 13), a prize can be generated in the accessory device 150, while the first distribution member 300 easily distributes it to the outside (VA2). While B1 and VA2 (RC2=14 to 16), winnings to the accessory device 150 hardly occur, and even if winnings, it is easy to be distributed to the outside. When B3 is reached (RC2=17 to 19), although winnings to the accessory device 150 hardly occur, the first distribution member 300 does not distribute to the outside (VA3) and the second distribution. The distribution to the V winning side by the member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, from the relationship with the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, in the round of the opening/closing pattern B, the V winning occurs during the period of B2 (RC2=11 to 13). If not, the probability of V winning is low in other periods, and the possibility of continuing the round is low.

In the opening/closing pattern C, during C1 (RC2=1 to 16), winnings to the accessory device 150 hardly occur. However, if it occurs, if it occurs, during VA1 (RC2=1 to 10). ) Is more likely to be a V prize than VA2 (RC2=11 to 16). On the other hand, when C2 (RC2=17 to 19), winnings in the accessory device 150 are more likely to occur than in C1, and further, the distribution to the out side by the first distribution member 300 is not performed (VA3). ), the distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 may occur (VB2). That is, from the relationship with the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310, in the round of the opening/closing pattern C, V win hardly occurs in the period of C1, but in the period of C2. There are expectations for the occurrence of V winnings, and we can expect to continue the round.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 are the same in each round, but the ease of continuing the round is different depending on the opening/closing pattern of each round (RC1). To do. Further, the ease of continuing the round (easiness of winning the V prize) also differs depending on the number of times of opening and closing (RC2) in each round.

Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 25) of each round, after referring to the round pattern table in step S1404, the process of setting the opening/closing pattern of the corresponding round is executed in step S1405. Specifically, the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are provided with flag storage areas corresponding to the respective patterns A to C. For example, in the case of the opening/closing pattern A, the flags are stored in the corresponding areas.

If the continuation flag is stored in step S1402, or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set to "9". The winning counter PC indicates the number of winnings in one round game, and in the present embodiment, the nine rounds of gaming balls win the prize device 150 in one round game to end the round game. Then, in step S1407, a process of setting "19" in the second round counter RC2 is executed, and then the present setting process is ended.

Returning to the description of the opening/closing process (FIG. 24 ), after performing the process of step S1304, the setting process for each opening is performed in step S1305.

In each opening setting process, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether a continuation flag is stored. This process is similar to the process of step S1402. If the continuation flag is stored, in the subsequent step S1502, the opening/closing pattern for this round is set to A1. That is, in the 16R continuous mode, the opening/closing pattern having the longest opening time is set in all rounds (RC1) and all opening times (RC2). Therefore, in the 16R continuation mode, the maximum winning number of winnings is likely to occur in each round. In the present embodiment, in the open/close execution mode of the 16R continuation mode, the game continues in the next round without V winning (even if the continuation condition is not satisfied).

If the continuation flag is not stored in step S1501 and the continuation rate variation mode is set, the process advances to step S1503. In step S1503, the second round counter RC2 is grasped to grasp how many times the opening/closing accessory 168 has been opened this time. Then, in step S1504, the open/close pattern table is referenced from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and the corresponding open/close patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, and C1 to C2 are set in step S1505.

In subsequent step S1506, a process of setting the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 corresponding to the value of the second round counter RC2 this time is executed. In this processing, the above-mentioned first distribution counter and second distribution counter provided in the RAM 114 are used. Then, referring to the open/close pattern table, the operation patterns of the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are grasped, and the values corresponding to the timings of shifting from the non-distribution state to the distribution state are input. As described above, these distribution counters are updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle and become a predetermined value (for example, “0”), so that the corresponding distribution members 300 and 310 are displaced (non-distribution state→ It is possible to understand that it is the timing of distribution. Then, in the closing process (step S1321) and the closing time setting process (step S1324 and step S1325) described later, the displacing members 300 and 310 are displaced (distributed state→non-distributed state) and non-distributed. A value corresponding to the period in which the minute state is maintained is input to the distribution counter. After that, when the same distribution counter reaches a predetermined value, it becomes possible to grasp the timing of the displacement (non-distributed state→distributed state) again.

After performing the process of step S1502 or the process of step S1506, the process of subtracting “1” from the second round counter RC2 is performed in step S1507, and then the setting process is ended.

Returning to the description of the opening/closing process (FIG. 24 ), after executing the setting process for each opening in step S1305, the opening process is executed in step S1306. Specifically, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is started to open the opening/closing accessory 168. Then, in step S1307, an opening command is set, and this opening/closing process is ended. The set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). In this release command, in addition to information as to whether the mode is the 16R continuation mode, what round of opening (information of the first round counter RC1) and what number of opening in one round (second) The information of the round counter RC2) and the information of the opening/closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3 and C1 to C2 are included. In the effect control device 82, based on the received opening command, the opening/closing pattern, the winning rate to the accessory device 150, the level of the V prize ratio when the prize to the accessory device 150 occurs, etc. are notified. The contents are determined, and various devices are controlled so that the contents of the decided effect are executed.

If the opening/closing accessory 168 is open in step S1301, the flow advances to step S1308 to determine whether the value of the timer counter T is “0”. If the value of the timer counter T is not "0", it is determined in step S1309 based on the detection state of the entrance sensor 179 whether or not the game ball has won the accessory device 150. If no winning is generated, the main opening/closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a prize has been generated, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by "1" in step S1310, and then, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not a V prize is generated by the V prize sensor 192. Determined by

In step S1311, when the V winning is generated, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the continuation flag is stored, and it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is the 16R continuation mode. Then, if the V winning is not generated in step S1311, or if the 16R continuation mode is in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313, and it is determined whether or not the winning counter PC is "0". .. If it is not “0” and the maximum winning number in one round has not been reached, the main opening/closing process is ended as it is.

If the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1308, or if the winning counter PC is "0" in step S1313, further V winning is generated in the continuation rate variation mode in step S1312. In this case, each process for closing the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed in steps S1314 to S1328.

That is, if the winning counter PC is "0" in step S1313 and the maximum winning number is reached, it is determined in step S1314 whether the continuation flag is stored. This process is similar to the process of step S1312. If the continuation flag is not stored and the mode is the continuation rate variation mode, the process of clearing the first round counter RC1 to "0" is executed in step S1315. This process is a process for ending the opening/closing execution mode when the maximum number of winnings in the round game is reached without the V winning in the continuation rate variation mode.

On the other hand, if the timer counter T is "0" in step S1308 or if the winning counter PC is "0" in the 16R continuation mode in step S1314, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, a process of subtracting “1” from the second round counter RC2 is executed. Then, in step S1317, it is determined whether or not the second round counter RC2 is “0”. When a V winning is generated in the continuation rate variation mode in step S1312, a process of clearing the second round counter RC2 to "0" is executed in step S1318. This process is a process for ending the round game in the continuation rate variation mode when a V winning occurs in the middle of the round game.

If it is determined in step S1317 that the second round counter RC2 is "0", or after executing the process of step S1318, it is determined in step S1319 that one round has ended and the first round counter RC1 is set. The process of subtracting "1" is executed. Then, in step S1320, a process of storing the round update flag in various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is executed. The round update flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to understand that each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round.

When the processing of step S1315 is performed (when the maximum winning number of one round is reached without the V winning being generated in the continuation rate variation mode), the second round counter RC2 is not “0” in step S1317 , And when the process of step S1320 is executed, after either of, the process proceeds to step S1321. In step S1321, a closing process is executed. In this process, the drive control of the opening/closing accessory driving unit 173 is terminated, and the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed.

Then, in step S1322, it is determined whether or not the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the round is the final round of the open/close execution mode. If the first round counter RC1 is not "0", the flow advances to step S1323 to determine whether the above round update flag is stored. If the round update flag is stored and each process for closing this time is a process corresponding to the end of one round, the process proceeds to step S1324.

In step S1324, a process of setting the closing time (closing period, waiting period) between each round is executed. In this process, a numerical value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 sec) set in advance is input to the timer counter T.

On the other hand, in step S1323, the round update flag is not stored, and each closing process this time corresponds to each opening (closing) during one round (corresponding to the second round counter RC2). In that case, the process proceeds to step S1325. In step S1325, a process of setting the closing time (closing period, waiting period) for each opening is executed. In this process, by referring to the value of the second round counter RC2 and the above-mentioned opening/closing pattern table, the closing time (closing period, waiting period) of this time is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to that time is counted by the timer counter. Enter in T.

After executing the processing of step S1324 or step S1325, a closing command is set in step S1326, and the present opening/closing processing ends. The set closing command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This closing command includes information as to whether each processing for closing this time corresponds to the end of one round, or whether each processing for opening and closing during one round. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to each of the above information based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

If it is determined in step S1322 that the first round counter RC1 is “0”, ending processing is executed in step S1327. In the start processing, a waiting time for ending the opening/closing execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counter provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. In this case, the waiting time information is different depending on the type of open/close execution mode (16R continuous mode or continuous rate changing mode), and the 16R continuous mode may have a longer waiting time for ending than the continuous rate changing mode. Wait time information is set. Further, in the continuation rate variation mode, the standby time information is set such that the standby time for ending becomes longer as the open/close execution mode continues longer (the number of round games was larger). By doing so, even if the opening/closing execution mode ends with a small number of round games, it is possible to immediately shift to the next game, and it is expected that the next opening/closing execution mode will occur. The player's feelings can be switched so as to perform. In other words, by increasing the waiting time for ending as the number of round games is increased in the opening/closing execution mode this time, it is possible to increase the time in which the player is immersed in the sense of superiority. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by "1" every time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12) is executed.

After that, in step S1328, after setting the ending command, the opening/closing process is ended. This set ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 15). This ending command includes information on the waiting time for ending set in step S1327, information on the type of opening/closing execution mode, the number of times the round game is continued, and the like. The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect content is executed. The contents of this effect include the display mode on the symbol display device 51, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 100 as a display content command. In the display control device 100, based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, display control of the symbol display device 51 is performed so that a display (for example, a moving image display) corresponding to the present opening/closing execution mode is performed.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing (FIG. 23), after executing the opening/closing processing in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” in step S1212, and in step S1213. It is determined whether or not the waiting time for ending has elapsed. When the value of the first round counter RC1 is not "0" or when the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round counter RC1 is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S1214, a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In this processing, processing for returning the gaming state after the opening/closing execution mode to the normal gaming state (normal gaming state) is performed. For example, the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are arranged at the initial positions.

As a normal game state, the opening/closing mode of the electric accessory 39a provided in the second operating port 39 changes (for example, the opening/closing mode in which the second operating port 39 is more likely to win than other states) In the case of providing a game state in which the type and probability of the game result at the time of winning a prize in the operating ports 38, 39 change (for example, the probability of a direct hit result changes), etc., when the opening/closing execution mode ends. It is advisable to adopt a configuration in which those gaming states are set in the transition processing of.

After the transition processing at the time of ending the open/close execution mode in step S1214 is completed, in step S1215, after the termination processing of the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state transition processing is ended. In the ending process of the open/close execution mode, the continuation flag used during the open/close execution mode is erased. Further, in step S1215, information that the one opening/closing execution mode has ended is externally output by, for example, stopping the jackpot signal output in 1209. As a result, the hall computer in the game hall can grasp the start and end of one opening/closing execution mode.

With reference to the timing chart of FIG. 29, the relationship between the opening/closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2 in the opening and closing execution mode and the operation timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the present embodiment will be described. explain. For details of each opening/closing pattern, refer to FIG. 28 again.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA1 (RC2=1 to 10), the non-distribution state is changed to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. Then, after that (after 0.1 sec), the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state at the timing of t2. In this situation (RC2=1 to 10), since the second distribution member 310 is not displaced, the distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

If the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is A1 in the situation of this operation pattern VA1, the opening state is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1 and the open state is maintained until the timing of t6 (after 1.8 sec). .. In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state to the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state (1.8 sec) is very small. In the pattern, there is a low possibility that the first distribution member 300 will distribute the pattern to the out side.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B1(C1) in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, the opening state is displaced at the timing of t1 and the opening state is at t3 earlier than the timing of t6. It is maintained until the timing (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (0.1 sec) in which the first distributing member 300 is in the distribution state to the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state (0.2 sec) is in the opening/closing pattern A1. Compared with the case, the possibility of being distributed to the out side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening/closing pattern A1. However, since the period during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is short, the winning probability for the accessory device 150 is lower than that of the opening/closing pattern A1. In consideration of the winning probability to the accessory device 150 and the distribution rate by the first distribution member 300 when a prize is won, in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, the opening/closing pattern A1 is the opening/closing pattern B1 (C1). ) Is higher than V).

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA2 (RC2=11 to 16), the non-distribution state is changed to the distribution state at the same timing as t1 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state. Displace. After that (after 1.0 sec), the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state at the timing of t4. In this situation (RC2=11 to 16), since the second distribution member 310 is not displaced, the distribution to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

When the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is A1 in the situation of this operation pattern VA2, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state for the period (1.8 sec) in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state. The ratio of the period (1.0 sec) is larger than that in the situation of the operation pattern VA1, and the possibility of being distributed to the out-side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the operation pattern VA1. ..

On the other hand, when the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B2 (RC2=11 to 13) in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the opening state is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is from the timing of the above t3. Is maintained until the timing t4 (after 1.0 sec), which is the latest. In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state to the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state (1.0 sec) is in the opening/closing pattern B1. Compared with the case, the possibility of being distributed to the out side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening/closing pattern B1. However, since the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is longer than that in the opening/closing pattern B1, the winning probability for the accessory device 150 is higher than that in the opening/closing pattern B1. In consideration of the winning probability to the accessory device 150 and the distribution ratio by the first distribution member 300 when a prize is won, the opening/closing pattern B2 is more open/closed in the situation of the operation pattern VA2. ) Is higher than V).

When the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B1(C1) (RC2=14 to 16) in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, the opening state is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is t3. Is maintained until the timing (after 0.2 sec). In this case, the ratio of the period (1.0 sec) in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state to the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state (0.2 sec) is the opening/closing pattern B1, Compared to the case of B2, the possibility of being distributed to the out side by the first distribution member 300 is higher than that of the opening/closing patterns B1 and B2 in the operation pattern VA1. Further, since the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is shorter than the opening/closing pattern B2, the winning probability for the accessory device 150 is lower than that in the opening/closing pattern B2. Further, in the case of this operation pattern VA2, the opening/closing timing of the switchgear 168 and the period in which the open/closed state is maintained are the same as in the case of VA1, but in the case of VA2, the switchgear 168 is from the open state. Since there is a period in which the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state even after the switching to the closed state, for example, with the game ball winning the role material device 150 just before the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the closed state. Even if there is, there is a possibility that the first distributing member 300 may distribute it to the detached side thereafter. Therefore, in the situation of the operation pattern VA2, B1 has a lower V winning probability than the opening/closing pattern B2, and even with the same opening/closing pattern B1, VA2 has a lower V winning probability than VA1.

When the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is VA3 (RC2=17 to 19), the first distribution member 300 does not operate, and therefore there is no possibility that the first distribution member 300 distributes it to the out side. .. On the other hand, in this period, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is switched from VB1 to VB2, and there is a possibility that the second distribution member 310 may distribute the operation pattern to the V winning side. Specifically, in the operation pattern VB2, at the timing of t4, which is 1.0 sec after the timing of t1 at which the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state, the second distributing member 310 changes from the non-distributed state to the distributed state. Is displaced to. Then, the distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec thereafter, and the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state at the timing of t5.

When the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is A2(C2) in the situation of the operation patterns VA3 and VB2, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is at the timing of t4. It is maintained until (after 1.0 sec). In this case, if the game ball has won the accessory device 150 just before the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the closed state, there is a possibility that the game ball will be distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 thereafter.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is B3 in the situation of the operation patterns VA3 and VB2, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t1, and the open state is at the timing of t3 ( It is maintained until 0.2 seconds later). In this case, even if the game ball enters the accessory device 150, the interval between the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distributing member 310 is in the distributing state. Therefore, in this pattern, the possibility of being distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 is low.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

When the opening/closing accessory 168 provided in the accessory device 150 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, a game ball can be won in the accessory device 150, and the V winning sensor in the accessory device 150. In the configuration in which the round in the open/close execution mode is continued by being detected by 192, the open/close timing of the open/close accessory 168 is changed in each round. Thereby, the continuation rate (V winning rate) of each round is changed without changing the operation timing of each accessory (the distribution members 300, 310, the rotating body 201, etc.) provided in the accessory device 150. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

In each round game of the open/close execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode, a round (open/close pattern B or C) in which the V winning probability is lower than other rounds (open/close pattern A) is provided. As a result, it is possible to particularly draw attention to whether or not to continue to the next round in this round, and it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention.

The round next to the opening/closing pattern having a low V winning probability is a round having an opening/closing pattern having a higher V winning probability. As a result, if a round with a low V winning probability is passed, it is easier to continue the round, and the degree of attention to a round with a low V winning probability can be further increased.

In the open/close pattern of each round, the V winning probability is changed depending on the number of times the open/close accessory 168 is opened/closed. As a result, in one round game, it is possible to perform a game such as how many times the player opens and closes to win the V prize, and how easy it is to win the V prize, so that the interest can be improved.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state is made different so that the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is made different. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described.

In the present embodiment, the winning/non-winning judgment based on winning in the first working opening 38 and the winning/winning judgment based on winning in the second working opening 39 are different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, in the present embodiment, in the result table storage area 113a of the ROM 113, the result table for the first working port (FIG. 30(a)) and the result table for the second working port are stored. The result table (FIG. 30B) is stored. The result table for the first working port is the same as the result table in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

In the result table for the second operating port, a special opening A result and a special opening B result are set as the game result in addition to the disconnection result, the direct hit result, the normal opening result. The special opening A result and the special opening B result have the same number of opening times (two times) as the normal opening result, and the first opening timing is the same as the normal opening result (by the opening type counter CS). The length of the period for maintaining the first open state, the length of the period for maintaining the closed state, and the length of the period for maintaining the second open state are set to be different.

Specifically, in the case of the normal opening result, the period in which the open state is continued is uniformly 2.0 sec, and the waiting period in which the closed state is maintained between the first opening and the second opening. Is uniformly 1.0 sec. On the other hand, in the case of the special open A result, the period during which the first open state is maintained is the period TC1 (0.1 sec), and the period during which the second open state is maintained is the period TC3( 0.7 sec), and the waiting period between the first and second open states is the period TC2 (1.2 sec). In the case of the special open B result, the period in which the first open state is maintained is the period TD1 (0.1 sec), and the period in which the second open state is maintained is the period TD3 (0.3 sec). ), and the waiting period between the first and second open states is the period TD2 (1.5 sec).

The period during which the first open state is maintained and the period during which the second open state is maintained are set in step S902 in the control process (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S902, the game result that triggered the present opening is referred to, and based on the result, a process of inputting a numerical value corresponding to the present opening period to the opening period counter is executed. The waiting period between the first and second open states is set in step S909 in the above-described control process (FIG. 20). Specifically, in step S909, the game result that triggered the opening of this time is referred to, and based on the result, a process of inputting a numerical value corresponding to the current waiting period to the waiting period counter is executed.

In this embodiment, the relationship between the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) shows the relationship between the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the case of the normal opening result, and FIG. 31(b) shows the special opening A result. 3 shows the relationship between the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the case of the special opening B result.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), when a winning is made to the operation ports 38, 39 at the timing of t1, the opening/closing accessory at the timing of t2 after a period corresponding to the value of the opening type counter CS (step S802). 168 is displaced to the open state. Then, this open state is maintained for 2.0 seconds, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t9. If the prize generated at the timing of t1 is the prize for the second operation port 39 and the result of the normal opening is two times, the opening/closing accessory 168 will be opened at the timing of t10, which is the timing 1.0 sec after the timing of t9. Displaces to the open state. Then, this open state is also maintained for 2.0 sec, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t14.

The operation of each distribution member 300, 310 will be described. As described above, the setting of the operation timing of each distribution member 300, 310 and the drive control are the first distribution setting of step S803 in the control start process (FIG. 19). The process is performed by the second distribution setting process of step S804, the first distribution control process of step S1002 and the second distribution control process of step S1004 in the distribution process (FIG. 21).

The first allocating member 300 is displaced from the non-allocating state to the allocating state at a timing t2 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state (after the lapse of the first period after being in the open state) for 1.5 sec. This distribution state is maintained over the (second period). Then, at the timing of t5, the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state. If the current opening is the result of opening twice, the non-sorting state is maintained for 1.0 sec (the fifth period) from the timing of t5, and the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 thereafter is t10. At the timing (after the lapse of the first period from the open state), the state is changed to the distribution state again. This distribution state is also maintained for 1.5 sec (second period), and is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t11.

The second allocating member 310 is displaced from the non-allocating state to the allocating state at a timing of t7 which is 1.8 seconds (third period) after the timing of t2 when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened. .. This distribution state is maintained for 0.1 sec (fourth period), and is displaced to the non-distribution state at the timing of t8. If this opening is the result of opening twice, after the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened at the timing of t8 to the timing of t10 for 0.6 sec (sixth period). The non-sorting state is maintained over 1.8 seconds (third period). Then, at the timing of t12, the non-distributed state is displaced to the distributed state, the state is maintained for 0.1 sec (the fourth period), and at the timing of t13, the non-distributed state is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, when the winning to the operation ports 38, 39 occurs at the timing of t1, the value of the opening type counter CS After a period corresponding to (step S802), the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2. This operation is the same as in the case of the above-mentioned normal opening result.

When the game result is the special opening A result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (time period TC1) from the timing of t2, and it is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t4, which is 1.2 seconds (period TC2) after the timing of t3, the closed state is displaced to the open state. This open state is maintained for 0.7 sec (time period TC3), the open state is changed to the closed state at the timing of t9, and the second open is completed.

When the game result is the special open B result, the open state is maintained for 0.1 sec (period TD1) from the timing of t2, and the game machine is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t3. Then, at the timing of t6 which is 1.5 seconds (period TD2) after the timing of t3, the closed state is displaced to the open state. This open state is maintained for 0.3 sec (period TD3), the open state is changed to the closed state at the timing of t8, and the second open is completed.

Here, even when the game result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the operation timings of the distribution members 300 and 310 are the same. Therefore, the ratio of the period in which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state/non-distribution state to one opening period in the opening/closing accessory 168 is the normal opening result, the special opening A result, and the special opening B result. Are different.

Specifically, in the normal opening result, in one opening state (for example, t2 to t9, t10 to t14), the proportion of the first distributing member 300 in the distributing state is 15/20, and the second distributing member 300 is in the second distributing state. The ratio of the distribution member 310 in the distribution state is 1/20.

On the other hand, in the case of the special opening A result, in the second opening state (t4 to t9), the proportion of the first sorting member 300 in the sorting state is 2/7, which is the normal opening result. Lower than if. Further, the proportion of the second distributing member 310 in the distributing state is 1/7, which is higher than that in the case of the normal opening result.

In the case of the special opening B result, in the second opening state (t6 to t8), the proportion of the first distributing member 300 in the distributing state is 0/3, which is lower than the case of the normal opening result. Further, the proportion of the second distributing member 310 in the distributing state is 1/3, which is higher than that in the case of the above normal opening result.

As described above, when the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, distribution to the out side may occur, and when the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state, distribution to the V winning side is performed. Can occur. Therefore, as described above, if the probability of being distributed by the first distribution member 300 is lower than that of the normal opening result as in the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the probability of occurrence of the V winning is high. Further, if the probability of being distributed by the second distributing member 310 is higher than that of the normal opening result, the probability of occurrence of the V winning is higher.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150 are changed by changing the opening/closing mode of the opening/closing accessory 168 in the normal gaming state. Without doing so, it is possible to change the probability that a V winning will occur when a prize is won in the accessory device 150.

In addition, by setting the number of times of the normal opening result (2 times) based on the winning to the second operation port 39 (2 times) and the number of times of the special opening A result and the special opening B result (2 times) to be the same number of times, Since it is not necessary to increase the number of opening/closing patterns, the storage capacity can be reduced.

The opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 based on the winning of the second operation opening 39 is the same as other normal opening results even if the special opening A result or the special opening B result (opening type counter). Timing according to the value of CS). As a result, it is possible to suppress the action of hitting the game ball in synchronization with the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, so-called hitting.

The special opening A result and the special opening B result may be notified by the symbol display device 51 or the like at a timing before the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168. By doing so, for example, it is easy to win the V prize because of the relationship between the rotational position of the rotating body 201 and the period required to reach the deriving unit 186, and the operation timing of the distribution members 300 and 310. Compared with the structure that informs the difficulty of sheathing after the winning of the prize device 150 is generated, the ease of the V prize is determined and the difficulty of the V prize is given before the winning of the prize device 150. Can be done in. By doing so, it is possible to further draw attention to the operation of the game ball (flow-down mode).

In the present embodiment, the level of the V winning rate has been described in relation to the normal opening result and each special opening result, but the concept of the present invention can be applied even if the following changes are made. Therefore, in the modified example shown in FIG. 32, the level of the V winning rate will be described based on the relationship between each special opening result and the distribution members 300 and 310 (particularly the second distribution member 310).

In this modification, the special opening A result, the special opening B result, and the special opening C result are set as the special opening result. Each of the special opening A to C results is the result of performing the opening operation twice like the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the above embodiment. Each of the special openings A to C may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning of the first working opening 38, or may be distributed with a predetermined probability based on the winning of the second working opening 39. It may be distributed.

In the special opening A result in the modified example shown in FIG. 32(a), the value of the opening type counter CS is based on the prize (that has been distributed) to one of the operation ports 38 and 39 generated at the timing of ta1. Then, the first opening operation is performed at the timing ta2 (the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state).

In the present modification, the second distribution member 310 serving as a distribution member that changes the V winning rate is distributed after 1.4 seconds (the timing of ta7) which is a predetermined period from the timing of t2. It is assumed that the state is changed to the state and the state is maintained for 0.4 sec (the state is changed to the non-sorting state at the timing of ta9).

In the first opening operation as a result of the special opening A, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TE1) from the timing of ta2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of ta3 (opening/closing accessory 168). Is displaced to a closed state). Then, the second opening operation is started (the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state) at the timing of ta7 which is 1.2 sec (the period TE2) after the timing of ta3. After that, the second opening operation is completed (the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state) at the timing of ta9 which is 0.4 sec (the period TE3) after the timing of ta7.

In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in the present modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TF1) from the timing of ta2, and the 1st opening operation is performed at the timing of ta3, similarly to the special opening A result. The opening operation for the second time ends. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of ta6, which is 0.8 seconds (period TF2) different (shorter) from the timing of ta3 and different from the period TE2. After that, the second opening operation ends at the timing of ta8, which is 0.5 sec (period TF3) after the timing of ta6.

In the first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (period TG1) from the timing of ta2, as in the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and ta3. At this timing, the first opening operation ends. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of ta4, which is 0.5 sec (period TG2) different (shorter) from the timing of ta3 and different from the period TE2 and the period TF2. After that, the second opening operation ends at the timing of ta5, which is 0.2 sec (period TG3) after the timing of ta4.

In these cases, the special opening A result overlaps with the situation in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state from the timing ta7 to the timing ta9 when the opening state is maintained in the second opening operation. In this situation, if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, it is almost distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310.

In the special opening B result, in the second opening operation, the period in which the opening state is maintained is longer than the special opening A result (period TE3<period TF3), while the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the opening state. And the period in which the second allocating member 310 is in the allocating state are the period from the timing of ta7 to the timing of ta8, and the situation in which the overlapping occurs is more than the case of the special opening A result. It gets shorter. As a result, even if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, it is not almost distributed to the V winning side as in the special opening A result, but is distributed to the V winning side by the second distribution member 310 according to the winning timing. Whether or not it will be different. More specifically, if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 during the final stage of the second opening operation, it is distributed to the V winning side, and otherwise it is not distributed to the V winning side.

In the special opening C result, in the second opening operation, the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state do not overlap. As a result, even if a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150 in the second opening operation, the distribution to the V prize side by the second distribution member 310 does not occur.

As described above, by setting the opening operation timing of each special opening A to C result, it is possible to make different the probability that the V winning occurs.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 32( b ), the second distribution member 310 is made the same as the modified example shown in FIG. 32( a ), while the total period during which the open state of each special opening A to C is maintained is the same. Therefore, the opening/closing timing is set so that the probability of distribution to the V winning side is different.

That is, as in the case of FIG. 32A, the second distribution member 310 has a timing tb8, which is a timing 1.4 seconds after a predetermined timing tb2 which is the first opening timing. Displaced to the distribution state. Then, at a timing of tb10 which is 0.4 sec after that, the state is changed to the non-sorting state.

In the first opening operation as a result of the special opening A in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (the period TH1) from the timing of tb2, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of tb3. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of tb8, which is 1.2 seconds (period TH2) after the timing of tb3. After that, the second opening operation ends at the timing of ta9, which is 0.4 sec (period TH3) after the timing of tb8.

In the first opening operation of the special opening B result in this modification, the opening state is maintained for 0.2 sec (time period TI1) from the timing of tb2, and the 1st opening operation is performed at the timing of tb3, similarly to the special opening A result. The opening operation for the second time ends. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of tb7, which is 0.9 sec (period TI2) different (shorter) from the above-mentioned period TH2 from the timing of tb3. After that, the second opening operation ends at the timing of tb9 which is 0.4 sec (period TI3) after the timing of tb7.

The first opening operation of the special opening C result in this modified example is different from the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and is different from the above-mentioned period TH1 and period TI1 from the timing of tb2 (long) 0.4 sec (period TJ1). ), the open state is maintained, and the first opening operation ends at the timing of tb4. Then, the second opening operation is started at the timing of tb5 which is 0.3 sec (period TJ2) different (shorter) from the timing of tb4, which is different (shorter) from the period TH2 and the period TI2. After that, the second opening operation ends at the timing of tb6 which is 0.2 sec (period TJ3) after the timing of tb5.

In these cases, the total time during which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state in the special opening A result is TH1+TH3 (0.6 sec), and in the case of the special opening B result is TI1+TI3 (0.6 sec). In the case of the open C result, it is TJ1+TJ3 (0.6 sec), and in any of the special open A to C results, the total period in the open state has the same length.

As described above, even when the opening/closing timings of the special opening A to C results are set so that the total period in the opening state is the same, the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the opening state. The overlap between the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state and the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state is in the order of special opening A result>special opening B result>special opening C result. As a result, in each opening result, it is possible to make the V winning rate different depending on the operation timing of the second distribution member 310, without making the winning rate itself to the accessory device 150 different.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the opening/closing pattern setting method for each round in the opening/closing execution mode is different from that of the first and second embodiments. Therefore, the setting process of each round in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the setting process for each round is the process executed in step S1304 of the opening/closing process (FIG. 24) in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), and is started when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened. Processing.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the setting process for each round in the present embodiment is almost the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 25 in the description of the first embodiment. The difference is that when it is determined in step S1402 that the continuation flag is not stored, the processing for setting the predetermined round pattern is executed in steps S1403 and S1404 in each of the above embodiments. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when a negative determination is made in step S1402, a lottery process for determining a round pattern by lottery is executed in step S1408. In this lottery process, a lottery counter for round patterns is acquired from various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, and a lottery table for round patterns is acquired from various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. The round pattern lottery counter is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is updated in a predetermined cycle, and can obtain random numerical value information.

The lottery table for round patterns can determine the current round pattern according to the value of the lottery counter for round patterns. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(b), for example, the lottery table is set such that the current round pattern is different depending on the previous round pattern. That is, depending on the previous round pattern, the selection rate of the pattern A that is most likely to continue in the round as the current round pattern is different, and if the previous round pattern is the pattern A, the pattern A is selected at 50%. In other cases, the pattern B or the pattern C in which it is difficult to continue the round is selected, whereas if the previous round pattern is the pattern B or the pattern C in which the round is difficult to continue, almost the pattern A is selected (in the pattern B, 80%, 90% in pattern C). In addition, in the first round of the opening/closing execution mode, a predetermined pattern may be set, or a random pattern may be set by lottery or the like.

After performing the process of step S1408, the corresponding round pattern setting process is performed in step S1405, and then the processes of step S1406 and subsequent steps are performed.

By adopting a configuration in which the round pattern is determined by lottery or the like for each round as described above, the open pattern of each round in the opening/closing execution mode becomes more diverse, and the game can be diversified. In the above embodiment, the round of the pattern (pattern A) that is easy to continue in the round is set easily in the next round after the round of the pattern (patterns B and C) that is difficult to continue in the game. Even if the round is disadvantageous to the player, if it is overcome, the next round becomes advantageous to the player, so that even the disadvantageous round can be absorbed in the game. On the other hand, in the next round of the pattern that is easy to continue, it is easy to select the round that is difficult to continue, so it is possible to achieve fairness in the game without significantly increasing the participation rate. Become.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the round pattern for the next time and thereafter is set according to the timing when the V winning is generated as the condition for continuing the round is satisfied.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing processing in this embodiment, and is basically the same as the opening/closing processing (FIG. 24) in each of the above-described embodiments. The difference is that when a V winning is generated in step S1311, and when it is determined in step S1312 that the continuous variation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1318 in the above embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, the step In S1329, a process of grasping the timing when the V winning occurs, that is, the number of times of opening during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 separately without being affected by the update, even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing during the round. Is configured.

After the value of the second round counter RC2 is stored in step S1329, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to “0” in step S1318, and the processes of step S1319 and subsequent steps are executed.

The setting process for each round in the present embodiment is configured such that the round pattern lottery process is executed for each round shown in FIG. 33A in the third embodiment. Then, as the round pattern lottery table (sorting table) in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c), the previous round pattern, the second round counter RC2, and The next round pattern is set to be different depending on the value of. More specifically, if the previous round was a pattern A round that is easy to continue, as shown in FIG. 35(a), in the next round, the second round counter RC2 is more than 1-16. In the case of 17 to 19, the pattern A in which the round can be continued easily is selected more easily.

That is, in the previous round, opening and closing of the first half (RC2 = 1 to 10) and the second half (RC2 = 11 to 16) are better when the conditions for continuing the round are satisfied at the opening and closing times of the final stage (RC2 = 17 to 19). The structure is more advantageous to the player in the next round than when the condition for continuing the round is satisfied depending on the number of times.

By doing this, even if the condition of continuation of the round is not easily established and the player may be anxious, it is advantageous to continue the round in the final stage, and the anxiety and the next The game can be enjoyed with a good balance with the round advantage.

In particular, in the final stage of pattern A (RC2=17 to 19), V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is likely to occur, and therefore, in pattern A, the condition of the round continuation does not hold until the final stage. However, in the final stage, the condition for continuing the round is easily satisfied, and the occurrence of the event that the opening/closing execution mode ends without satisfying the condition for continuing the round is suppressed. Therefore, as described above, in a game in which the player can enjoy the balance, it is considered that the player is highly interested in the timing of the V winning so that the V winning is generated at the end of the round as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35A, when pattern A is compared with the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the second half (11 to 16), the first half continues the round in the next round more than the latter half. The easy pattern A is set to be easily selected, and the first half is set to be more advantageous in the next round than the second half.

In each of the above-described embodiments including this embodiment, in the opening/closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode, if the condition for continuing the round is satisfied, the following upper limit number (9) for one round is not reached. Since the game is configured to shift to the round, it is considered that the player is interested in winning the V prize at the prize winning number as close to the upper limit number as possible. Then, for example, if the player wins V in a stage where the number of winning prizes is small, the player may feel that he/she is lost in the round in relation to the upper limit number of winning prizes. Therefore, as described above, the case where V is won in the first half of the round where the number of prizes will be relatively small is the next time than the case where V is won in the latter half of the round where the number of prizes is larger than that. If the round is configured to be advantageous to the player, even if it is the round that the player feels lost as described above, the round is guaranteed and the player's dissatisfaction is satisfied. It can be resolved.

In the lottery (sorting) table at the time of pattern B shown in FIG. 35(b) and the lottery (sorting) table at the time of pattern C shown in FIG. When the V winning occurs, it is easy to select the pattern A that is easy to continue the round in the next round. More specifically, as described above, in the pattern B, the opening/closing pattern is set so that the V winning can occur in the latter half of the round (RC2=11 to 16), and if the V winning occurs at that timing. The next time, the round of pattern A, which is advantageous for the player, is likely to occur. Further, in the pattern C, the opening/closing pattern is set so that the V winning can occur in the final stage of the round (RC2=17 to 19), and if the V winning occurs at that timing, the next advantageous pattern for the player. It's easy to get an A round. On the other hand, in the pattern B, in the first half of the round (RC2=1 to 10) and in the final stage (RC2=17 to 19), winning of the prize device 150 is unlikely to occur. Similarly, in the pattern C, in the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the second half (RC2=11 to 16) of the round, the winning of the prize device 150 is unlikely to occur. Therefore, with the above-described configuration, the points of interest to the player can be aggregated, and the intonation of the game can be added.

The lottery table for each pattern is merely an example, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, if a V prize is generated at a timing at which a prize is less likely to occur in pattern B or pattern C, it is set so as to be advantageous to the player (so that pattern A can be easily selected). Even in a situation in which it is difficult to generate a prize, it is possible to generate the meaning of trying to generate a prize in the accessory device 150, and it is possible to suppress a so-called hit-and-stop action of stopping the firing of the game ball. ..

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the variation of the open pattern is different from that in the fourth embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 36, as the open pattern in the present embodiment, a pattern D or a pattern E is set in addition to or in place of the patterns A to C.

In the pattern D, in the first half (RC2=1 to 10) and the second half (RC2=11 to 16) of the round, a prize may be awarded to the accessory device 150, and there is a sufficient possibility of a V prize. However, compared to the pattern A, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are set to be low.

Then, in the final stage of the round in pattern D (RC2=17 to 19), the maintenance period of the open state is set longer than that of pattern A, and the winning rate and the V winning rate to the accessory device 150 are the pattern A. The pattern D is set higher than the pattern D. Therefore, in the final stage of the round, the condition of continuation of the round is more likely to be satisfied in the pattern D than in the pattern A, and as described above, the ease of establishment of the condition is suppressed in the first half and the latter half of the round, but the final continuation of the round is performed. The condition can be satisfied. Therefore, in the pattern D, the condition for continuing the round is likely to be satisfied in the vicinity of the winning upper limit number, and the pattern is more advantageous to the player than the pattern A in the open/close execution mode of the continuous variation mode.

In the pattern E, in the first half of the round (RC2=1 to 10), the period in which the open state is maintained is set longer than that in the pattern A. Therefore, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are higher than those in the pattern A, and the condition for continuing the round is easily satisfied during this period. On the other hand, in the latter half of the round (RC2=10 to 16), it is set so that winning in the accessory device 150 is unlikely to occur, and the opening/closing timing similar to that of the pattern B1 in the pattern B or the pattern C1 in the pattern C. Has become.

Then, in the final stage of the round in pattern E (RC2=17 to 19), the maintenance period of the open state is set longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and there is a sufficient possibility of winning in the accessory device 150. Further, if the game ball wins the accessory device 150 during the maintenance period of the open state, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is the opening/closing timing.

As shown in FIGS. 37(a) to 37(e), the round pattern lottery table (sorting table) according to the present embodiment is based on the values of the previous round pattern and the second round counter RC2. The next round pattern is set to be different.

The difference from the fourth embodiment is that in the lottery (sorting) table for each of the patterns A to C, an example in which the patterns are distributed to the pattern D and the pattern E is added, and the pattern D and the pattern E are different. The point is that a lottery (sorting) table is set. Here, the features of the lottery tables for the patterns D and E will be described in detail.

In the lottery table of the pattern D, if the round continuation conditions are satisfied in the first half and the second half (RC=1 to 16) of the round, the patterns A, D, and E that are easy to continue are difficult to select, and the patterns are difficult to continue. It is easy to select B and C. On the other hand, when the round continuation condition is satisfied in the final stage of the round (RC=17 to 19), the pattern A in which the round can be easily continued is easily selected. As described above, in the first half and the second half of the round, the winnings to the accessory device 150 may occur, but since the continuation condition is set to be less likely to be established than in the pattern A, in the first half and the second half of the round, the winning is made. However, it is possible to entertain the situation that the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied (the V winning is hard to be generated). Then, in the final stage of the round in the pattern D, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are increased, so that the continuation condition is easily established. Therefore, in the pattern D, in the first half and the second half of the round, the maximum number of winning prizes of the round is reached to the limit, and the winning number is reached or the V prize is reached so that the winning limit is reached in the final stage. Can be controlled by a person to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to expect active participation of the player in the game.

In the lottery table of the pattern E, when the V winning occurs in the first half of the round (RC2=1 to 10) in which the winning is likely to occur in the accessory device 150, the patterns B and C in which the round is difficult to continue are easily selected, and the round continuing is easy. Patterns A, D, and E that are easy to remove are hard to be selected. On the other hand, when a V prize occurs in the final round of the round (RC2=17 to 19) in which a prize is likely to occur in the similar accessory device 150, it is easy to select the pattern A in which the round can be easily continued. Therefore, even if the number of times of opening and closing the winnings to the accessory device 150 is likely to occur, it is possible to select whether to win the prize in the first half or to win the prize in the final stage in relation to the continuity rate of the next round. Players can be expected to actively participate in the game.

Further, in the lottery table of the pattern E, if the V winning occurs in the latter half of the round (RC2=11 to 16) in which it is difficult to win the prize device 150, it is easy to select the pattern A or the pattern E in which the round can be continued easily. ing. Due to the relationship between this point and the selection rate when a V prize occurs in the final stage, depending on the number of rounds, it may be more advantageous for the player to aim for the prize device 150 from the latter half. Therefore, even in a situation in which it is difficult for a prize to be won in the accessory device 150, it is possible to cause the meaning of launching a game ball and suppress a so-called hitting action.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in the fourth and fifth embodiments, the special notification is executed at a predetermined timing in the opening/closing execution mode. First, the production process executed by the MPU 142 of the production control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. The effect process is a process activated in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the effect process, a process for executing various effects is performed based on a command from the main control device 81. By the way, the RAM 144 of the effect control device 82 is provided with a received command storage area capable of storing the command received from the main control device 81. The area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can read the previously stored commands.

In the production process, first, in step SB101, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received. As described above, the opening command is a command output from the main control device 81 at each opening in each round in the opening/closing process in the opening/closing execution mode. When it is determined in step SB101 that the release command is received, the release handling process is executed in step SB102. As will be described in detail later, this process is a process for executing special notification at a predetermined timing in the opening/closing execution mode.

When a negative determination is made in step SB101 or after the process of step SB102 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB103. In step SB103, it is determined whether or not the normal release command has been received. As described above, in the normal opening command, the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39 occurs during the normal gaming state, and the lottery result based on the winning operation causes the opening/closing action of the opening/closing accessory 168 like the direct hit result or the miss result. It is a command output from the main control device 81 except when it is not performed (when it is a normal opening result or a special opening result). When it is determined in step SB103 that the normal release command is received, the normal release handling process is executed in step SB104. Incidentally, the normal opening command includes information such as the content of the lottery result set by the main controller 81, the number of times of opening, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, and the like. In this normal opening support processing, based on the information of the received command, the opening number notification for notifying the number of opening when the operating ports 38, 39 are won, and the notification for opening as an effect when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened are performed. Executes the process for performing the effect.

When a negative determination is made in step SB103, or after the process of step SB104 is executed, the process proceeds to step SB105. In step SB105, as other processing, another command received from the main control device 81 (a shift command including information on winning or holding information shift in the normal gaming state, a miss command or a direct hit command indicating a game result) Also, the contents of the command based on a control end command, a winning command in the accessory, various commands such as an opening command, a closing command, and an ending command related to the control of the opening/closing execution mode, which are output when the accessory device 150 is controlled. The display content command is output to the display control device 100 so as to execute the effect according to the above, and the process for controlling the display of the symbol display device 51 is executed. Further, in step SB105, for example, if an operation means for effect (effect button or the like) is connected to the effect control device 82, effect for responding to the operation (effect for operating the effect button) is executed. .. Further, in step SB105, control for performing demonstration screen demonstrations and other controls for various demonstrations are executed. Then, after executing the process of step SB105, the main effect process is ended.

Next, the contents of the special notification during the opening/closing execution mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern in the opening/closing execution mode which is added or changed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the opening handling process, and FIG. (C) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of various special effects performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as a special notification.

First, as shown in FIG. 39(a), in the present embodiment, as the opening pattern of the opening/closing execution mode, the pattern C and the pattern F in which the opening/closing timing differs depending on the value of the opening number (RC2) are set. .. As described above, in the pattern C, the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened/closed at a timing when it is difficult to win the prize in the accessory device 150 in both the first half (RC2=1-10) and the second half (RC2=11-16) of the round. Works. Then, in the final stage of the round (RC2=17 to 19), the opening/closing accessory 168 operates at a timing at which V distribution by the second distribution member 310 may occur.

In the pattern F, in the first half of the round (RC2=1 to 10), like the pattern C, the opening/closing accessory 168 operates at an opening/closing timing at which it is difficult to win a prize in the accessory device 150. The operation timing is the same as that of pattern C. Therefore, in the first half of the round, it is difficult or impossible for the player to identify whether the round pattern of pattern C is selected or the round pattern of pattern F is selected.

In the pattern F, in the latter half of the round (RC2=11 to 16), unlike the pattern C, the opening/closing accessory 168 operates at the opening/closing timing at which winning of the prize device 150 is likely to occur. That is, in the latter half of the round, unlike the pattern C, a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150, and a V prize may also be issued as a condition for continuing the round.

In pattern F, when the final round of the round (RC2=17 to 19) is reached, V distribution may occur similarly to pattern C, but the period during which the open state of the switchgear 168 is maintained is the above pattern. It becomes longer than the case of C, and the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V winning rate are also higher than those of the pattern C.

As described above, when pattern C and pattern F are compared, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is the same opening/closing pattern in the first half of the round, and as a result, the opening/closing pattern of the player is It is difficult to identify which pattern C or F the round is. On the other hand, with respect to the latter half and the final part of the round, the pattern F is overwhelmingly advantageous to the player than the pattern C.

Therefore, such a change in the situation is notified on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. As a process therefor, as shown in FIG. 39(b), a release handling process corresponding to the release command output from the main control device 81 during the open/close execution mode is executed. By the way, the opening command output from the main control device 81 includes information on the type of the open/close execution mode (16R continuous mode or continuous variable mode), and the open command output at each open is Information on whether the release is a release command at the start of the round or a release command corresponding to each release number during the round, numerical information of the first round counter RC1 and numerical information of the second round counter RC2, and the like are included. The production control device 82 side can also grasp these pieces of information.

In the opening support process, first, in step SB201, a process of determining whether or not the current opening pattern is the pattern C or the pattern F is executed. If the pattern is not the pattern C or the pattern F, the present handling process is ended as it is. If it is the pattern C or the pattern F, it is determined in step SB202 whether or not the second round counter RC2 is "11". As described above, when the second round counter RC2 is 1 to 10, the opening/closing member operates in the same opening/closing pattern as the pattern C and the pattern F, and the pattern becomes the pattern after the second round counter RC2 becomes “11”. A difference between the opening and closing patterns of C and pattern F occurs. Therefore, if the second round counter RC2 is not "11" in step SB202, the present support process is terminated as it is, and if it is "11", the process proceeds to step SB203.

In step SB203, it is determined whether the pattern is C or not. If it is the pattern F instead of the pattern C, the process proceeds to step SB204, the display control device 100 is controlled to execute the special effect A on the symbol display device 51, and then the present correspondence process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pattern is C in step SB203, the process proceeds to step SB205, the display control device 100 is controlled to execute the special effect B on the symbol display device 51, and then the corresponding process is performed. finish.

As shown in FIG. 39(c), in the special effect A, for example, "Lucky!!" is displayed on the display screen G so as to notify that it is advantageous to the player after the timing (after the second half of the round). Continuation chance!" is displayed. In the special effect B, after the timing (after the latter half of the round), it is displayed on the display screen G, for example, so as to notify the player that it is more disadvantageous than when the special effect A is performed. ...(Sorry)" is displayed. In the case of the present embodiment, even in the case of the pattern C, there is a possibility that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 may be performed in the final stage of the round (RC2=17 to 19). In the special effect B, "... Do not give up until the end!" is displayed so as to notify that an advantageous situation exists.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is the same up to the middle of the round, and the opening/closing pattern (pattern F) that is advantageous to the player from a predetermined timing is more disadvantageous. The opening/closing pattern (pattern C) is provided, and at the predetermined timing, the pattern display device 51 notifies which pattern the pattern is. By doing so, it is difficult to identify which round the pattern is up to the predetermined timing, and it is possible to draw attention to the special notification at the predetermined timing.

In particular, until the predetermined timing, the situation is disadvantageous to the player (a situation in which winning of the prize device device 150 is unlikely to occur). It is considered that the player will be highly interested in such a point as to whether or not it changes to.

In the above embodiment, if the pattern F and the pattern F are selected more easily than the pattern C in the open/close execution mode of the continuous variation mode, it is usually assumed that the player is disadvantageous. , It is possible to enhance the unexpected feeling when the special notification A is performed (when the pattern F is selected). This makes it easier for the player to feel the benefits of the special notification A being given.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In this embodiment, in the sixth embodiment, the special notification is executed at a predetermined timing during the normal gaming state. As the special notification during the normal game state, the first special notification and the second special notification that suggest adjusting the firing timing of the game ball are set. Although details of each of these special notifications will be described later in detail, the winning rate to the accessory device 150 and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 are performed by each special notification. , Is set to increase.

As a condition for executing these special notifications, in the present embodiment, for example, in accordance with the round continuation timing in the opening/closing execution mode, a mode in which the special notification, which is advantageous to the player, is easily executed and a mode in which it is not And These modes will be described in detail later, but first, a process related to grasping the round continuation timing related to the transition of the mode will be described.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing process in this embodiment.

The opening/closing process in this embodiment is basically the same as the opening/closing process (FIG. 24) in each of the above-described embodiments. The difference is that when a V winning is generated in step S1311, and when it is determined in step S1312 that the continuous variation mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1318 in the above embodiments, whereas in the present embodiment, the step In S1329, a process of grasping the timing when the V winning occurs, that is, the number of times of opening during the round is executed. More specifically, a process of storing the value of the second round counter RC2 in the second round counter RC2 storage area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. The second round counter RC2 storage area can store the value of the second round counter RC2 separately without being affected by the update, even if the second round counter RC2 is updated at each opening and closing during the round. Is configured. This is as described in the fourth embodiment.

After performing the process of step S1329, a process of adding the value of the second round counter RC2 grasped in step S1329 in step S1330 to the value of the total round counter TRC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. To execute. The total round counter TRC is a counter for storing an integrated value at the timing (value of RC2) when the round continuation condition is satisfied in V winning in the opening/closing execution mode of the continuous variation mode.

After executing the process of step S1330, the second round counter RC2 is cleared to "0" in step S1318, and the processes of step S1319 and subsequent steps are executed.

Further, in the opening/closing process of the present embodiment, the value of the total round counter TRC in the current opening/closing execution mode is output to the effect control device 82 at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, that is, at the ending. That is, after executing the ending start process in step S1327, a process of reading the value of the total round counter TRC from the various counter areas 114d is executed in step S1331, and in step S1328, the total command is issued in response to the ending command. Set the value of the round counter TRC.

As described above, the ending command is output from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82, and the process corresponding to the command is performed in the other process (step SB105) of the effect process (FIG. 38). Although detailed description with the drawings is omitted, in the other processing, based on the reception of the ending command, the special display of the symbol display device 51 is executed according to the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command. The process of switching the display modes with different rates is performed.

As the display mode, a normal mode, a relief mode, and a special mode are set. As shown in FIG. 41(b), the rescue mode has the highest execution rate as the execution rate of the special notification when the special opening result is obtained based on, for example, the winning of the second operating port 39 during the normal gaming state. , The relief mode, the special mode, and the normal mode are set in this order so that the execution rate of the special notification increases. In this case, in the effect control device 82 that has received the ending command, if the value of the total round counter TRC included in the ending command is 1 to 50, the relief mode is set, and if it is 51 to 150, the normal mode is set. If it is 151 to 285, the special mode is set.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, if the V winning occurrence timing is early as the condition for continuing the round is satisfied, the rescue mode is easily set, and if it is late, the special mode is easily set. If the timing of occurrence of the V winning is early, there is a high possibility that the maximum winning number has not been reached. In addition, if the value of the total round counter TRC is small, it is highly possible that the open/close execution mode has ended in a short number of rounds. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode is set to the relief mode in which the special notification is more easily executed than usual. In this way, it is possible to remedy a player who has not obtained many benefits in the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, as described above, if the V winning occurs in the latter half (RC2=11 to 16) or the final stage (RC2=17 to 19) of each round and the round continuation condition is satisfied, the player is treated advantageously (see next). The pattern of the round is likely to be set to a pattern with a high continuation rate), and the player tries to operate so as to generate the V winning in the latter half or the final stage of the round as much as possible. As a result, the value of the total round counter TRC can also become high, so that the display mode is set to a special mode in which special notification is more easily executed than usual in accordance with the player's efforts. By doing so, it is possible to further expect the active participation of the player in the game.

Since the special mode is only for the active participation of the player, the execution rate of the special notification is lower in the special mode than in the rescue mode. By doing so, it is possible to ensure fairness of the game without increasing the rate of ball entry too much.

How the special notification is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 41(a) and 41(c). Note that the description will be given here based on the special opening A result described in the modification of the second embodiment and the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), it is assumed that a prize is generated in the operating ports 38, 39 at the timing of t1 and the game result is the special opening A result. In this case, the first opening operation starts at the timing of t2 and ends at the timing of t3. Further, the second opening operation is started at the timing of t5 and finished at the timing of t6.

Here, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle (0.6 sec, Pa) from the game ball firing mechanism 53 by operating the firing handle 60. For example, as a situation in which the operation of the firing handle 60 is continuously performed, a game ball is shot at the timing of P1, the next game ball is shot at the timing of P2 which is after Pa, and P3 which is after that Pa. It is assumed that the game ball is fired at the timing of, and the game ball is fired at the timing of P4, which is after Pa.

First, a case where no special notice is given will be described. In relation to the firing cycle Pa, for example, a game ball shot at the timing of P1 is won in the accessory device 150 by the first opening operation of the special opening A result. (T2 timing). In that case, it is assumed that the game ball reaches the second distribution member 310 at the timing t4, which is after the period required for the game ball winning in the accessory device 150 to reach the second distribution member 310. Then, at this timing, the second distribution member 310 is not in the distribution state, and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

Further, for example, it is assumed that the game ball shot at the timing of P4 reaches the accessory device 150 at the end of the second opening operation (timing of t6). In this case, although the second distribution member 310 is reached at the timing of t7, the second distribution member 310 does not perform the V distribution because the second distribution member 310 has already been displaced from the distribution state to the non-distribution state.

Next, a case where special notification is performed will be described. When a prize is generated in the operating ports 38, 39 at the timing of t8, for example, a display "Got a bit!!" is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 as the first special notification. Based on this display, the player stops firing the game ball. When the game result based on the winning at the timing of t8 is the special opening A result, the first opening operation is started at the timing of t9 and finished at the timing of t10. Then, the second opening operation starts at the timing of t12 and ends at the timing of t14.

In this case, when the game ball is launched at the timing of P5 which is the timing before the start of the second opening operation, the game ball wins the accessory device 150 at the timing of t12, and the winning game ball is The second distribution member 310 may be reached at the timing of t13, and as a result, V distribution may be performed and V winning may occur. In this case, at the timing of t11, which is a timing (0.1 sec, period PC) slightly before the timing of P5, as the second special notification, for example, “now, hitting” is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. "!!!!" is displayed. Based on this display, the player starts the shooting operation, and as a result, the game ball is shot at the timing of P5, and as described above, the V winning can occur. As a player, this means that the player has stopped the game ball shooting operation for a period of Pb that is longer than the shooting cycle Pa.

As described above, as the special notification, the V winning rate, that is, the transition rate to the opening/closing execution mode can be changed by performing the special notification instructing the game ball launching operation in relation to the opening operation. Then, by realizing it on the production side without changing the operation timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, the distribution members 300 and 310, or the rotating body 201, without changing the basic configuration of the gaming machine, It is possible to easily adjust the pitch and change the specifications of the game machine.

By performing the first special notification as described above, the period during which the shooting of the game ball is stopped can be extended. Therefore, for example, in the period from the first special notification to the second special notification, the firing of the game ball is not stopped, but is calculated backward from the timing (the timing of P5) at which the second special notification should be performed, and only slightly. The timing of performing the second special notification may be adjusted so that the V winning can occur even after the firing is stopped and the gaming ball is continued to be fired thereafter.

In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, in a situation where the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is likely to be small (TRC=1 to 50), it is configured to shift to an advantageous state for the player, so that the game is performed in the opening/closing execution mode. It will be possible to make up for the fact that the benefit obtained by the person was small.

Then, in the opening/closing execution mode, even in a situation where the number of winnings to the accessory device 150 is likely to be large (TRC=151 to 285), it is configured to shift to an advantageous state for the player, so that only in the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible not only to play a game ball such as winning a game ball in the accessory device 150, but also to pay attention to the winning timing (timing of occurrence of V winning) and the like to further encourage the active participation of the player in the game. ..

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the operation start timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 is changed as follows. That is, the operation start timing of the distribution members 300 and 310 is changed to the winning timing to the operation ports 38 and 39.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 is started based on the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39, and the operation pattern is uniformly set. Specifically, the first distribution member 300 distributes from the non-distributed state at the timing when the first period (1.5 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the timing when the winning at the first operation port 38 occurred. When a second period (1.5 sec in the present embodiment) elapses from the timing of the displacement, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. Further, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing when the third period (3.3 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the timing when the winning on the first operation port 38 occurred. However, when the fourth period (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from that timing, the distribution state returns to the non-distribution state. In the case of the second operation port 39, the operation pattern is the same as the operation pattern at the time of winning in the first operation port 38, and the operation pattern is the same until the middle. And the fourth period) are the same, and thereafter (after the second period or the fourth period elapses), the operation in the first period and the second period (the third period and the fourth period) is performed again. The pattern repeats. By doing so, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is determined and then the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 is determined as in the above embodiments. ..

On the other hand, if the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are uniformly set from the winning timing to the operation ports 38 and 39 in this way, for example, the second distribution member from the winning timing to the operation ports 38 and 39. It is feared that a so-called hit-and-stop action will be performed aiming at the distribution to the V winning side by 310. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above in the first embodiment, the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310 is uniformly set from the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39 as described above. By leaving the configuration in which the opening start timing of the accessory 168 is random, it is possible to suppress such a stopping action. Further, while randomizing the opening start timing in this way, it is possible to intentionally change the V winning rate on the game machine side by adjusting the opening start timing. The configuration for that purpose will be described in detail below.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing timing setting process in this embodiment. As described above, the opening/closing timing setting process is a process executed in step S802 of the control start process (step S506, FIG. 17) in the game control process (FIG. 16) of the normal process, and is the operating port during the normal game state. This is a process for setting the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 when a winning of 38 or 39 occurs.

In this embodiment, first, in step S1601, a process of acquiring an opening timing table from the opening timing table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is executed. As the release timing table in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, a first release timing table and a second release timing table are set.

As shown in FIG. 43( a ), the first opening timing table is from the activation timing of this processing to the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, similarly to the opening timing table (FIG. 11( c )) in each of the above-described embodiments. The release waiting time is set randomly (0.5 sec to 2.4 sec) according to the release type counter CS. On the other hand, in the second opening timing table, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the first distribution member 300 (outside distribution) and the second distribution member when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the opened state. The release standby time is set according to the relationship with the operation of 310 (V allocation). Then, in the second opening timing table, V winnings are more likely to occur than in the first opening timing table. The second opening timing table will be described in detail later, but like the first opening timing table, the opening standby time is set to differ depending on the opening type counter CS.

Which release timing table is selected is different depending on, for example, a game state at the time of starting this processing (when a winning is made in the operation openings 38 and 39). Specifically, the second opening timing table is selected or selected until the predetermined end condition is satisfied after the end of the predetermined opening/closing execution mode (for example, the opening/closing execution mode of the 16R continuation mode). After the end condition is satisfied, the first opening timing is selected or is easily selected. As the ending condition, for example, a configuration that is satisfied when the number of winnings to the operating ports 38 and 39 and the number of times the opening/closing member 168 is opened (number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or a predetermined number of times. A configuration or the like that is established by shifting to the open/close execution mode (for example, the open/close execution mode that is the continuous variation mode) can be considered.

After one of the release timing tables is selected in step S1601, the release type counter CS is acquired in step S1602, and a process of setting the corresponding release timing (release waiting time) is performed in step S1603. After that, the main opening/closing timing setting process ends.

Details of each opening timing table selected in step S1601 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 44 in addition to FIG. 43.

First, the relationship between the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the opening standby time of the opening/closing accessory 168 will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, when a win is generated in the first operation port 38 at the timing of t1, the first distribution member 300 is after the lapse of the first period (after 1.5 seconds) from the timing of t1 at which the prize is generated. The non-distributed state is changed to the distributed state at the timing of t3, and the distributed state is changed to the non-distributed state at the timing of t6, which is after the elapse of the second period thereafter (1.5 seconds later). Further, the second allocating member 310 is displaced from the non-allocating state to the allocating state at the timing of t7 which is after the lapse of the third period (after 3.3 seconds) from the timing of t1 when the winning occurs, and thereafter, After the lapse of the fourth period (0.1 sec), the distribution state is changed to the non-distribution state at the timing of t8.

The opening waiting time is determined based on the winning of the first operating opening 38, and for example, the opening waiting time is shorter than the first period until the displacement timing of the first distribution member 300 (for example, 0. 5 sec), the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 after the elapse of the first waiting time from the winning, and thereafter, a predetermined period (2.0 sec, step S902). The open state is maintained over the time period (refer to FIG. 3) and the closed state is displaced at the timing of t5. In this case, in the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state, the period in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state (outside sorting period) overlaps, and the length of the period is 1.0 sec. Becomes Further, there is no overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state (V distribution period).

On the other hand, the opening waiting time determined based on the winning of the first operating opening 38 becomes the second waiting time (for example, 2.4 sec) longer than the first period until the displacement timing of the first distributing member 300. When set, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t4 after the second waiting time has elapsed from the winning, and thereafter, the opening/closing object 168 is opened for a predetermined period (2.0 sec). The state is maintained, and the state is changed to the closed state at the timing of t10. In this case, in the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state, the deviating distribution period with the first distributing member 300 overlaps, but becomes shorter than that in the case where the first waiting time is set, and that period Has a length of 0.6 sec. Further, the V distribution period with the second distribution member 310 overlaps, and the length of the period becomes 0.1 sec.

The operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the case where the winning is generated in the second operation port 39 is the same as that in the case where the winning is generated in the first operation port 38. Although omitted, the first distribution member 300 is displaced to the non-distributed state at the timing of t6 and then to the distribution state at the timing of t11 after the lapse of the first period. Then, at the timing of t14, which is after the lapse of the second period from the timing of t11, the state is again changed to the non-sorting state. The second distribution member 310 is displaced to the non-distributed state at the timing of t8 and then to the distribution state at the timing of t15 after the elapse of the third period. Then, at the timing of t16, which is after the lapse of the fourth period from the timing of t15, the state is changed to the non-sorting state.

The opening waiting time is determined based on the winning of the second operating opening 39. For example, when the opening waiting time is the first waiting time, the out-of-range allocation period or the V allocation period for the first opening. Is the same as that at the time of winning the first operating port 38. The standby time between the first opening and the second opening is set at the timing of t5 when the first opening ends, and this time is a predetermined period (1.0 sec, see step S909). ing. Then, at the timing of t9 when the waiting time elapses, the second open state is set, and the open state is maintained for a predetermined period (2.0 sec, see step S902). Then, at the timing of t13 when the period elapses, the state is changed to the closed state. As described above, when the first waiting time is set to 0.5 sec, the out-of-range distribution period at the time of the second opening is 1.1 sec, which is longer than that in the first opening. Further, even when the second opening is performed, there is no overlap with the V allocation period.

When the opening waiting time determined based on the winning of the second operating opening is the second waiting time, the first operation is performed for the out-of-range distribution period and the V distribution period for the first opening. This is the same as when winning the prize in the mouth 38. At the timing of t10 when the first opening is completed, the waiting time between each opening is set (1.0 sec, see step S909), and the state is changed to the open state at the timing of t12 when the period elapses. Then, at the timing of t17 when the period in which the open state is maintained (see step S902 in 2.0 sec) elapses, the state is changed to the closed state. In this way, when 2.4 sec is set as the second standby time, the out-of-range distribution period at the time of the second opening is 0.6 sec, which is the same length as the first time. Also, at the time of the second opening, overlap with the V allocation period occurs, and the length of the period is 0.1 sec, which is the same as the case of the first time.

In this way, the lengths of the out-of-range allocation period and the V allocation period may differ depending on the set open waiting time. Then, in the present embodiment, in the second opening timing table, the V winning rate is changed by utilizing the overlapping relationship with the deviation distribution period or the V distribution period.

That is, when the opening waiting time is set from 0.5 sec (first timing) to 1.0 sec (second timing), the period overlapping with the out-of-range distribution period gradually becomes longer (1.0 sec→1.5 sec). ). Therefore, the probability that the game balls won in the accessory device 150 will be distributed to the detached side will be higher when the opening waiting time is set to 1.0 sec than when it is set to 0.5 sec. In other words, the V winning rate becomes low. Therefore, in the second opening timing table, as shown in FIG. 43B, the opening type counter is set so that the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 1.0 sec is lower than the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 0.5 sec. The value of CS is assigned.

Further, when the release waiting time is set from 1.0 sec (second timing) to 1.3 sec (third timing), the length of the period overlapping with the out-of-range allocation period does not change (the longest 1. It remains 5 sec), and there is no overlap with the V allocation period. Therefore, the value of the open type counter CS is assigned such that the probability of being set to these open waiting times is lower than the probability of being set to other times.

If the release waiting time is set to 1.4 sec (fourth timing) or later, which is later than 1.3 sec (third timing), overlap with the V allocation period occurs. Therefore, although the length of the overlapping period with the out-of-range allocation period is the same as the length when the longest overlapping occurs, the opening standby time is 1.4 sec as the period with which the V allocation period overlaps. From the (fourth timing) to 1.5 sec (fifth timing), the value of the open type counter CS is set to be higher than the probability set to the above 1.0 sec to 1.3 sec (second timing to third timing). Has been allocated.

When the release waiting time is set from 1.5 sec (fifth timing) to 2.4 sec (sixth timing) after 1.4 sec (fourth timing), the period overlapping with the out-of-range distribution period is gradually increased. Becomes shorter (1.5sec→0.6sec). Further, when set in this period, any overlap with the V allocation period occurs, and the length thereof does not change at 0.1 sec. Therefore, the probability that the game balls won in the accessory device 150 will be distributed to the detached side will be lower when the opening standby time is set to 2.4 seconds than when set to 1.5 seconds. In other words, the V winning rate increases. Therefore, in the second opening timing table, the value of the opening type counter CS is assigned such that the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 2.4 seconds is higher than the probability that the opening waiting time is set to 1.5 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set to be a fixed operation from the timing when the winning of the working openings 38 and 39 occurs, and then the winning of the winning openings 38 and 39. Since it is configured to change the opening waiting time from when the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened, it is possible to change the probability of V winning in the accessory device 150.

In this embodiment, in changing the V winning probability, the operation pattern after the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state is a uniform pattern. That is, although the V winning probability is changed as described above, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 does not need to be significantly changed, and only the waiting time before opening (opening waiting time) may be changed. Has become. By doing so, it is possible to make the V winning rate different with a simple configuration.

Although the first opening timing table and the second opening timing table are provided as the opening timing table, other tables may be provided, or only the second opening timing table may be provided. In addition, in the second opening timing table, the opening waiting time for which the V winning rate is high is easily selected, but the opening waiting time for which the V winning rate is low may be easily selected.

The opening timing table may be selected by lottery or the like. In this case, the probability of winning the lottery (the probability of selecting the second opening timing table) may be changed according to the gaming state.

Although the release timing table selected according to the game state at the time of digestion of the hold information based on the winning to the operation ports 38, 39 is different, the release timing selected according to the game state at the time of acquisition of the hold information. The tables may have different configurations. For example, regarding the hold information acquired during the open/close execution mode, if the second opening timing table is selected or configured to be easily selected, the hold information is acquired during the open/close execution mode as an advantage. It is possible to induce a holiday cottage, which can enhance the interest. In particular, for example, if the prize device 150 is rarely won in the opening/closing execution mode, it is easy for the player to feel dissatisfaction that a prize ball is difficult to obtain even though the player is in the opening/closing execution mode. On the other hand, if the holding information acquired during the opening/closing execution mode is advantageously treated as described above, even if a winning of the accessory device 150 is unlikely to occur during the opening/closing execution mode, the spill ball Is expected to win a prize in the operating ports 38, 39, and as a result, it is possible to realize a new game property in which not only the above-mentioned dissatisfaction is alleviated but also the opening/closing execution mode itself is easily connected.

Further, regarding the hold information acquired when the number of hold information is a predetermined number (for example, two) or more, if the second release timing table is selected or is easily selected (advantageously treated), the hold information is set. It is possible to generate the merit of acquiring a lot of. In the first place, a table in which the winning of the operating ports 38, 39 is more likely to occur is more likely to cause the winning of the accessory device 150, and as a result, the opening/closing execution mode is more likely to occur. Further, if the table is more advantageous as the above-mentioned structure, the more easily the hold information is accumulated, the more likely the table is to win a prize in the operating ports 38 and 39, the more likely the table is to open and close. Therefore, it is possible to widen the range of increase and decrease of the number of balls, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, for example, the operation of the accessory device 150 is set to be long, the length of the game times (variation display time) when the hold information is consumed is set to be long, etc. The longer the period from the digestion of information) to the end of the operation of the accessory device 150 is set, the easier it is for the hold information to be stored. In such a configuration, there is a possibility that a so-called hit-and-stop action of stopping the firing of the game ball is likely to be performed until the operation of the accessory device 150 ends. Therefore, if such a structure is applied to a structure in which the more easily the hold information is accumulated as described above, it is possible to cause the significance of accumulating the hold information, and to suppress the above-mentioned stopping action. It will be possible.

On the contrary, for the hold information acquired when the number of hold information is less than the predetermined number (for example, two), the second release timing table may be selected or easily selected (advantageously treated). .. By doing so, it is possible to remedy the winning even if the winning in the operating ports 38, 39 does not occur easily. However, with such a configuration, there is a possibility that the action of repeatedly starting and stopping the game ball is easily performed so as to make it difficult to store the hold information. Therefore, in the case of adopting the above-mentioned configuration, for example, when the game balls are continuously fired for a predetermined period or more and the number of hold information is less than the predetermined number, it may be advantageous to handle.

Further, from the viewpoint of the relief of the player (relief that the V prize does not occur easily), as the game state, the number of prizes to the operation ports 38 and 39 (the number of games) after the completion of one opening/closing execution mode. The configuration in which the easiness of selection of the second opening timing table is changed by, specifically, the number of winnings (the number of games) to the operating ports 38, 39 after the end of one opening/closing execution mode is a predetermined number or more. In this case, the second opening timing table may be selected or easily selected. By doing so, it is possible to relieve the so-called fit-stand, in which the open/close execution mode rarely occurs, and it is possible to cause the game to continue even with such a fit-stand.

From the standpoint of relieving the player, the advantage at the time of consuming the hold information is changed by the number of prizes (the number of games) to the operating ports 38, 39 after the one opening/closing execution mode is finished as described above. In addition to the configuration, the advantage may be changed according to the occurrence rate of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time, or the advantage may be changed according to the type of the previous opening/closing execution mode (for example, compared to the 16R continuation mode). It may be configured to increase the degree of advantage when it is in the disadvantageous continuous variation mode), and whether or not a V prize is generated when the predecessor information (for example, predecessor pending information) is consumed or the accessory device 150. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage is changed depending on whether or not a prize is won.

Further, as a configuration for changing the degree of advantage (changing the V winning rate) when the holding information is consumed, a configuration for changing the opening/closing waiting time as in the present embodiment may be used, or as in the second embodiment. The special opening result may be easily/difficultly selected to change the advantage.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are set constant from the timing of consuming the holding information, while the symbols on the main display section 43 fluctuate when the holding information is consumed. The display is executed, and the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started after the end of the variable display. The configuration for that purpose will be described below.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the game control processing in this embodiment. As described above, the game control process is a process executed in step S403 of the regular process (FIG. 15) that is regularly activated.

In the present embodiment, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is in the open/close execution mode, the present game control processing is ended as it is. If it is not in the open/close execution mode, it is determined in step S1702 whether or not the accessory control state is in effect. If it is not in the accessory control state, the process advances to step S1703. The processing of steps S1701 and S1702 is the same as the processing of steps S501 and S502.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. Here, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the symbols is started on the main display portion 43 based on the fact that the hold information is the object of the hit determination, and as a stop result corresponding to the result of the hit determination of the hold information. The end of the variable display is set as one game time, and the variable display of the game time is sequentially executed for each holding information. Then, in step S1703, when the counter corresponding to the variable display time set in the variable display time setting process (step S1706) described later does not reach a predetermined value (for example, "0"), one game is played. Judge that it is running. It should be noted that at the start of execution of one game time, flags corresponding to various flag storage areas 114e are stored, and the flag is erased at the end of one game time. In step S1703, the presence or absence of the flag is confirmed. It may be configured to determine whether or not one game is being executed.

If one game is being executed, this game control processing is ended as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the processing for the accessory control is not executed in the opening/closing execution mode and the accessory control state as well as in the one game play.

If one game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1704, and it is determined whether the common hold number CRN is "0". If it is "0", the game control process is finished as it is. This process is similar to the process of step S503.

If the common hold number CRN is not “0” in step S1704 and there is (undigested) hold information that is not the target of the hit determination, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, a data setting process is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S504, and a process for sequentially setting the values of the various counters C1, C2, CS, etc. for the undigested pending information as the object of the hit determination is executed.

In a succeeding step S1706, a variable display time setting process is executed. In the variable display time setting process, the current value of the common pending number CRN and the value of the release type counter CS for the current pending information are acquired, and these values are stored in various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113. By referring to the stored variable display time table, the variable display time of the current game time is specified, and the variable display time counters provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 indicate the specified variable display time. Perform the process of entering information.

In the variable display time table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the variable display time of each game time is set to be different depending on the value of the common hold number CRN, and the common hold number CRN is set. The larger the value is, that is, the larger the number of stored hold information is, the shorter the variable display time is set. When the value of the common hold number CRN is the same, which variable display time is set is randomly set at intervals of 0.1 sec according to the value of the open type counter CS. For example, when the common hold number CRN is “0”, one of the variable display times of 1.0 sec to 2.4 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value thereof is 1. It is 0.7 sec. When the common hold number CRN is "1", one of the variable display times of 0.7 sec to 1.5 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value is 1.1 sec. Is. When the common hold number CRN is “2”, one of the variable display times of 0.5 sec to 1.3 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and its average value is 0.9 sec. Is. When the common hold number CRN is "3" or more, one of the variable display times of 0.1 sec to 0.5 sec is selected according to the value of the open type counter CS, and the average value thereof is It is 0.3 sec.

Here, in the present embodiment, the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 is set such that the V winning rate increases as the period from the timing at which the reservation information is consumed as the occurrence of the predetermined event becomes shorter. Specifically, of the distribution members 300 and 310, the operation pattern of the second distribution member 310 is changed from the non-distributed state to the distributed state within 0.3 sec as the third period from the timing at which the hold information is consumed. Then, the state is maintained for 1.0 second as the fourth period. After that, the non-distributed state is maintained until the timing of digesting the next hold information. The setting of this operation pattern is set in the distribution setting process (second distribution setting process of step S804) in the control start process (FIG. 19) and the distribution process (FIG. 21) already described. Further, the operation pattern of the first distribution member 300 is the same as that in each of the above-described embodiments, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

After executing the process of step S1706, a win/fail judgment process (similar to step S505) is executed in step S1707, a control start process (similar to step S506) is executed in step S1708, and then a game control process is executed. finish. When it is determined in step S1702 that the accessory control is being performed, in-control processing (similar to step S507) is executed in step S1709, and distribution processing (similar to step S508) is executed in step S1710. After executing, in step S1711, the winning process (similar to step S509) is executed, and then the game control process is ended.

The relationship between the variation display time of the game times and the V allocation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46(b). Note that, in FIG. 46(b), the average value of the variable display times that can be selected according to each common pending number CRN is shown as an example.

When the hold information is consumed at the timing of t1, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distribution state to the distribution state at the timing of t2 which is 0.3 sec after the third period as described above. Then, the distribution state is maintained for 1.0 sec, which is the fourth period, and the state returns to the non-distribution state at the timing of t5.

If 1.7 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “0”, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed until the timing of t6 which is 1.7 seconds after the timing of t1. I (game time is executed), the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of the same t6. For example, when the game result is the (one time) opening result, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the opened state at the timing of t6, the opened state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and the timing of t9 is reached. Displaces to a closed state. In other words, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state as a predetermined event by setting a release waiting period of 1.7 sec from the time when the hold information is consumed at the timing t1 to the timing t6. .. In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state does not occur, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed.

If, for example, 1.1 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “1”, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed from the timing of t1 to the timing of t4 which is 1.1 seconds later. I (game time is executed), the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of the same t4. For example, when the game result is the (one time) opening result, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the opened state at the timing of t4, and the opened state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and at the timing of t8. Displaces to the closed state. In other words, as the predetermined event, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state by setting the release waiting period of 1.1 sec from the completion of the hold information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t4. .. In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distributing member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.2 sec) from the timing t4 to the timing t5, the accessory device 150 is at that timing. If the player wins, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if a prize is won in the accessory device 150 at a timing other than that timing (timing that does not overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed. I don't know.

When, for example, 0.9 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “2”, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is performed until the timing of t3, which is 0.9 sec after the timing of t1. I (game time is executed), the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of the same t3. For example, when the game result is the (one) open result, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t3, the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and the timing of t7. Displaces to the closed state. In other words, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state by setting a release waiting period of 0.9 sec from the digestion of the hold information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t3 as a predetermined event. .. In this case, the overlap with the period in which the second distributing member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (0.4 sec) from the timing of t3 to the timing of t5, and thus the accessory device 150 at that timing. If the player wins, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. In other words, even if a prize is won in the accessory device 150 at a timing other than that timing (timing that does not overlap with the period in which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state), the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is not performed. I don't know. The period during which the winning period for the accessory device 150 and the period during which the second sorting member 310 is in the sorting state overlap with each other are "2" as compared with the case where the common pending number CRN is "1". In the case of, it is longer. That is, the possibility of V allocation is higher when the common pending number CRN is “2” than when it is “1”.

If, for example, 0.3 sec is selected as the variable display time when the common hold number CRN is “3” or more, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is continued until the timing of t2 which is 0.3 sec after the timing of t1. It is performed (game times are executed), and the game result is displayed as the stop result at the timing of the same t2. For example, when the game result is the (one time) opening result, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2, the open state is maintained for 1.0 sec, and the timing of t5. Displaces to the closed state. In other words, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state as a predetermined event by setting a release waiting period of 0.3 sec from the completion of the hold information at the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. .. In this case, since the overlap with the period in which the second distributing member 310 is in the distribution state occurs in the period (1.0 sec) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t5, the accessory device 150 is at that timing. If the player wins, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed. Then, the period during which the period during which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 and the period during which the second distribution member 310 is in the distribution state overlap with each other are more than when the common pending number CRN is “1” or “2”. In the case of "3" or more, it is longer. That is, the possibility of V allocation is higher when the common pending number CRN is “3” or more than when it is “1” or “2”.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the number of common hold numbers CRN increases, the variation display time of the game time tends to be shorter, and the V winning rate increases as the variation display time shortens. , 310 are set, the more the pending information is stored, the higher the probability that the V winning will occur. With such a configuration, in a situation where the hold information is likely to be accumulated, for example, in the opening/closing execution mode, a V winning occurs thereafter (after the opening/closing execution mode), and the state shifts to the opening/closing execution mode again. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a villa easily occurs. In addition, a gaming machine for which the hold information is more likely to be acquired is a gaming machine in which a V prize is more likely to occur (easily shifts to the opening/closing execution mode), and the range of increase/decrease in the rate of departure is large, so that the interest can be improved. Become.

Further, in the case of the configuration having the high frequency support mode in which the electric accessory 39a is frequently opened, the high frequency support mode is set, so that the winning of the second working port 39 occurs. Since it becomes easier, the common reserve number CRN becomes easier to accumulate. That is, it becomes easy to shift to the open/close execution mode. By doing so, it is possible to substantially change the transition rate to the open/close execution mode without changing the operation pattern of each of the distribution members 300 and 310, and it is possible to diversify the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the V winning rate is changed by changing the variable display time of each game time has been described, but the period from the timing at which the hold information is consumed to the timing at which the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened is changed. The configuration for doing so has the same meaning as the configuration for changing the opening waiting time as in the second and third embodiments, and in any configuration, the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is not reached. The effect of changing the period can be expected.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the distribution members 300 and 310, the end of the opening/closing execution mode is defined as the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the distribution members 300 and 310 are cyclically operated after the completion of the opening/closing execution mode. To do.

Specifically, in the transition process (step S1214) at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition process (FIG. 23), a period (first period and The third period) is set (a process of inputting numerical information corresponding to the first distribution counter and the second distribution counter). Then, as shown in FIG. 47, in the normal processing in the present embodiment, the distribution processing (step S508 in FIG. 16) is executed as one processing of the normal processing. That is, in steps S1801 to S1804, the same processes as those in steps S401 to S404 are executed, and in step S1805, the distribution process is executed. The processing of steps S1806 to S1810 is the same as the processing of steps S405 to S409.

Although detailed description with the drawings is omitted, in the game control process (step S1803) in the present embodiment, since the above-described distribution process is a normal process, after executing the process during control in step S507, The winning process is executed in step S509, and the game control process is ended.

In the distribution process according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined in step S1901 whether the open/close execution mode is set. If the open/close execution mode is set, the main distribution process is performed as it is. To finish. This is because the setting of the operation of the distribution members 300 and 310 in the open/close execution mode is executed in the game state transition process (FIG. 23). If it is determined in step S1901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S1902. In step S1902, similarly to step S1001, it is determined whether it is the first allocation control timing. That is, by grasping the numerical information of the first distribution counter, the first period (the period in which the first distribution member 300 is maintained in the non-distribution state) or the second period (the first distribution member 300 is distributed). It is determined whether it is the end timing of the period of maintaining the state). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1902, then in step S1903, as in step S1002, the first distributing member 300 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state or from the distributed state. The first distribution driving unit 300a is drive-controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. In step S1903, a process of setting the numerical information corresponding to the period in which the displaced state is maintained in the first distribution counter is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1902 or after the processing of step S1903 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, similarly to step S1003, it is determined whether or not it is the second distribution control timing. That is, by grasping the numerical information of the second distribution counter, the third period (the period in which the second distribution member 310 is maintained in the non-distribution state) or the fourth period (the second distribution member 310 is distributed). It is determined whether it is the end timing of the period of maintaining the state). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1904, then in step S1905, as in step S1004, the second distribution member 310 is displaced from the non-distributed state to the distributed state or from the distributed state. The second distribution drive unit 310a is drive-controlled so as to be displaced to the minute state. Further, in step S1905, a process of setting the numerical information corresponding to the period for maintaining the displaced state in the second distribution counter is executed. When a negative determination is made in step S1904 or after the processing of step S1905 is executed, the main distribution processing is ended.

Next, the control start processing (step S506) in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the control start process is a process that is activated when the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 of the accessory device 150 is started in the game control process (FIG. 16 ).

First, in step S2001, a process of grasping the number of times of opening and closing is executed. This process is similar to the process of step S801. In a succeeding step S2002, processing for grasping the distribution status of the first distribution member 300 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the drive state of the first distribution drive unit 300a and the numerical information of the first distribution counter, the current state of the first distribution member 300 is not the distribution state. A process of grasping information indicating which of the distribution state and the remaining period information in which the state continues is executed. In a succeeding step S2003, processing for grasping the distribution status of the second distribution member 310 is executed. Specifically, by grasping the drive state of the second distribution driving unit 310a and the numerical information of the second distribution counter, the current state of the second distribution member 310 is not the distribution state. A process of grasping information indicating which of the distribution state and the remaining period information in which the state continues is executed.

In the following step S2004, an opening/closing timing setting process for setting the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003, and then this control start process ends.

Specifically, in the process of step S2004, the probability that the out-of-range distribution by the first distribution member 300 and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 are different based on the processing results of steps S2001 to S2003. Set the release waiting time to. How the opening waiting time is set will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 50, for example, after the opening/closing execution mode ends at the timing of t1, the drive control of the first distribution member 300 is periodically performed every time the first period and the second period elapse, and the third distribution member A configuration is shown in which the drive control of the second distribution member 310 is periodically performed every time the period or the fourth period elapses.

A win occurs at the timing of t2, the number of times of opening is grasped as 1 in step S2001, and the first allocating member 300 is in the non-allocating state in step S2002 and thereafter (at the timing of t3). It is assumed that it is understood that the second distribution member 310 is in the non-distributed state and that the second distribution member 310 is subsequently displaced (at the timing of t6) into the distributed state in step S2003. .. In this case, the first distribution member 300 facilitates out-of-balance distribution, and the second distribution member 310 does not easily perform V distribution, that is, the V winning rate decreases. , The first waiting time is set as the opening waiting time. Specifically, for example, the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to be in the open state at the timing of t4 during the period in which the first sorting member 300 is in the sorting state, and the state is maintained until the timing of t6. To be set. When set as described above, the first distribution member 300 disengages during the period in which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 (the period from the timing t4 to the timing t6) and the timing from the timing t4 to the timing t5. It overlaps with the period in which the distribution is performed, and does not overlap with the period in which the V distribution is performed by the second distribution member 310.

On the other hand, a win occurs at the timing of t8, the number of times of opening is grasped as 1 in step S2001, the first distributing member 300 is in the non-distributed state in step S2002, and then (timing of t9). In step S2003, it is determined that the second distributing member 310 is in the non-distributive state, and that the second distributing member 310 is in the non-distributive state. After that, it is assumed that it is understood (at the timing of t11) that the distribution state is changed. In this case, for example, due to the game state (the number of common hold numbers CRN) and a predetermined lottery, unlike the case of the timing of t2, the out-of-range distribution by the first distribution member 300 is less likely to be performed, and The second standby time is set as the opening standby time so that the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is facilitated, that is, the V winning rate is increased. For example, the opening/closing accessory 168 is set to be opened at the timing of t11 which is a period after the first allocating member 300 is displaced from the allocating state to the non-allocating state, and the state is the timing of t15. To be maintained until. When set as described above, the first distribution member 300 disengages during the period during which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 (the period from the timing t11 to the timing t15) and the timing from the timing t14 to the timing t15. Although the period in which the distribution is performed overlaps, the ratio in which the period in which the out-of-order distribution is performed overlaps is smaller than that in the case where the first waiting time is set. Further, the period in which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 and the period in which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is performed at the timing from t12 to t13 are overlapped, and the first waiting time is set. The ratio of overlapping with the period in which V allocation is performed is higher than in the case of That is, the V winning rate is higher when the second waiting time is set than when the first waiting time is set.

As described above, even in the configuration in which the distribution members 300 and 310 periodically operate, the V winning rate is changed by changing the waiting time for releasing the hold information from the timing of consuming the hold information as the occurrence of the predetermined event. Is possible.

In the above-described configuration, the opening waiting time is set differently depending on the grasped operation status of each of the distribution members 300 and 310, and the V winning rate is set to be different. It may be configured to set the waiting time. Specifically, by grasping the operation status of each of the distribution members 300 and 310 when the hold information is consumed, the period during which the prize can be won in the accessory device 150 and the period during which the deviation distribution overlaps are set in advance. As a configuration for setting the open waiting time so that the predetermined overlapping period (first specific period) is set, or the period overlapping with the V allocation is set to the predetermined second overlapping period (second specific period). Good. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the action of aiming at the game ball and increasing the V winning rate in accordance with the operating state of the distributing members 300 and 310 that operate periodically.

Further, in the above configuration, the game state at the time of grasping the operation status of each distribution member 300, 310 (for example, the number of pieces of pending information stored as in the fourth embodiment and the game after the opening/closing execution mode). The opening waiting time may be different so that the V winning rate is different depending on the number of times of winning, the number of winnings to the operation ports 38 and 39, the time using the RTC, etc.).

In the above configuration, the V winning rate may be changed by changing not only the opening waiting time but also the period during which the opened state is maintained and the number of times of opening, as in the second embodiment.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the rotation position of the rotating body 201 at the time of occurrence of a predetermined event is grasped, and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is set based on the grasped result. Hereinafter, the occurrence of the predetermined event will be described as an example when the hold information is consumed in the normal gaming state as the predetermined event.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the opening/closing timing setting process in this embodiment. As described above, the opening/closing timing setting process is a process (step S802 in FIG. 19) that is performed as a control start process (step S506) when the holding information is consumed in the game control process (FIG. 16).

In the present embodiment, first, in steps S2101 to S2104, the same processing as in steps S801 to S804 is executed to grasp the number of times of opening/closing, set the opening/closing timing, and set the operation of each distributing member 300, 310. .. In step S2102 of the present embodiment, the opening/closing timing is set in the same manner as in step S802, but as will be described later, the opening/closing timing may be changed thereafter, so the opening/closing timing is temporarily set. It can also be called processing.

In a succeeding step S2104, processing for grasping the current position of the rotating body 201 is executed. More specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotational position detection sensor 196, a process of grasping the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 is executed. Then, in step S2105, based on the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102, the period during which the game ball can be won in the accessory device 150 is ascertained, and if the game ball is won during that period, the game ball is won. The process of grasping the timing of reaching the deriving unit 186 and calculating the position of the rotating body 201 when the game ball winning the role device 150 reaches the deriving unit 186 is executed based on the grasped results. More specifically, it is assumed that it takes about 1.0 sec for the game ball that has won the prize device 150 to reach the derivation unit 186 (note that during this period, the prize device 150 has won). The period of the route in which the game balls reach the derivation unit 186 without being distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310 is shown, and this route is also referred to as a normal route in the following description), and the prize is awarded to the accessory device 150. The V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 is positioned at any position during a period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is temporarily set to be in the open state, that is, a timing that is delayed by 1.0 sec. Whether or not it is arranged is calculated from the detection signal of the rotational position detection sensor 196.

In a succeeding step S2107, a process of determining whether or not the V winning is possible on the normal route is executed based on the processing result of the step S2106. That is, assuming that the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 has arrived at the derivation unit 186 as a normal route, the V winning opening guide unit 204 of the rotating body 201 can receive the game ball that has arrived at the derivation unit 186 at that timing. It is determined whether or not it is placed in. When a negative determination is made in step S2107, that is, when the V winning is not possible in the normal route, the process proceeds to step S2108, and a change lottery process for whether to change the opening/closing timing is executed. In such processing, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114, a lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 113d of the ROM 113, and the open/close timing change lottery is executed based on these. Incidentally, the winning probability of this lottery is set to 10% in this embodiment.

In step S2109, based on the processing result of step S2108, it is determined whether or not the change lottery is won. When the change lottery has not been won, the main opening/closing timing setting process is ended as it is. That is, in this case, the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed.

When it is determined in step S2109 that the change lottery has been won, the first opening/closing timing changing process is executed in step S2110. In such a process, a process of changing the opening/closing waiting time is executed so that the V winning can be performed on the normal route. More specifically, the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 at the present time grasped in step S2105, and the period required for the game ball to reach the deriving portion 186 by the normal route (about 1.0 sec), From this, it is backcalculated as to when the opening/closing accessory 168 should be in the open state so that it is possible to win the prize device 150 at the timing when the V prize can be won on the normal route. The opening/closing waiting time is changed so that the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened. Then, the main opening/closing timing setting process ends.

When it is determined in step S2107 that the V prize can be obtained through the normal route, the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether or not the distribution (V distribution) by the second distribution member 310 may be performed by opening the opening/closing accessory 168 at the timing temporarily set in step S2102. .. Specifically, when the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the period in which the second allocating member 310 is in the allocating state overlap, the second allocating member is It is determined that V distribution by 310 is likely to be performed. When it is determined that there is no possibility of V distribution, that is, when there is a possibility that V winning will occur in the normal route and there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310. Ends the main opening/closing timing setting process. In this case, the opening/closing timing provisionally set in step S2102 is adopted as it is, and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed.

When it is determined in step S2111 that V distribution by the second distribution member 310 may be performed, that is, when it is determined that there is a possibility of V winning on both the normal route and the V distribution. , And proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, a process of temporarily changing the opening/closing timing (opening/closing waiting time) temporarily set in step S2102 is executed. More specifically, for example, the opening/closing timing is temporarily changed so that the opening/closing control is started at a timing delayed by a predetermined period (0.5 sec) from the opening/closing timing temporarily set in step S2102. In a succeeding step S2113, it is determined whether or not the V winning is possible by the normal route when the opening/closing pattern at the opening/closing timing temporarily changed in the step S2112 is adopted. If it is determined in step S2112 that the V winning is not possible on the normal route, that is, if the opening/closing timing provisionally set at step S2102 may cause the V winning on the normal route or the V allocation, the process proceeds to step S2113. When the opening/closing timing temporarily changed, if the V winning is lost in the normal route, the opening/closing timing setting process is ended as it is. In this case, the opening/closing timing temporarily changed in step S2102 is adopted as it is without adopting the opening/closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112, and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2113 that the V winning can be performed on the normal route even with the opening/closing timing temporarily changed in step S2112, the second opening/closing timing changing process is executed in step S2114. From this, the main opening/closing timing setting process ends. In the second opening/closing timing changing process, the opening/closing waiting time is set (that is, the numerical information corresponding to the waiting period counter is input again) so that the opening/closing pattern temporarily changed in step S2112 is applied.

The manner in which the opening/closing timing is changed will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the hold information is consumed at the timing of t1, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4. It is assumed that the temporary setting is performed (processing of step S2102). In FIG. 52A, the case where the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is executed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 and the overlap with the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state does not occur. ing. That is, in this case, there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310. However, as a result of the rotating body 201 rotating until the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 reaches the derivation unit 186, the derivation unit 186 can guide the game ball to the V winning opening guide unit 204. There is a nature. That is, this is the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2107 and a negative determination is made in step S2111. In this case, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is executed without changing the opening/closing timing temporarily set in step S2102.

In FIG. 51(b), although there is no possibility of V distribution by the second distribution member 310 as in the case of FIG. 51(a), unlike the case of FIG. 51(a), V on the normal route is different. It shows the case where there is a possibility of winning. That is, this is the case where a negative determination is made in step S2107. In this case, after the change lottery process in step S2108, if the change lottery is won, the first opening/closing timing change process is performed in step S2110.

As the opening/closing pattern after the change, in the pattern 1, the opening/closing waiting time is changed (delayed) from the timing of t2 to the timing of t2.1. The timing of t2.1 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (timing from 5 to t6). Then, without changing the period in which the open/closed object 168 is maintained in the open state, it is later than the timing of t4 and later than the timing of overlapping with the V allocation (later than the timing of t5 to t6) t4.1. Displace to the closed state at the timing of. As a result, the time in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time in which the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 can be performed overlap.

The opening/closing pattern after the change is not limited to the above example, and may be changed as follows.

As the open/close pattern after the change, in pattern 2, the open/close standby time is not changed from the timing of t2, and the period in which the open state of the open/close accessory 168 is maintained is changed (lengthened). Then, the timing at which the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state remains t2, but the timing to be displaced to the closed state is later than the timing of t4 and later than the overlapping timing with the V allocation (from t5 to t6). (Slower than the timing) Displace at the timing of t4.2.

As the open/close pattern after the change, pattern 3 shows an example in which both the open/close standby time and the time during which the open/closed accessory 168 is kept open are changed. That is, in pattern 3, the opening/closing waiting time is changed to the timing of t2.2 which is later than the timing of t2, and the timing of shifting to the closed state is changed to the timing of t4.2 which is later than the timing of t4. The timing of t2.2 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (timing from 5 to t6).

As the opening/closing pattern after the change, in pattern 4, the number of times of opening and closing is changed and the time when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time when the second distribution member 310 can perform the V distribution are overlapped. An example of changing the opening/closing pattern is shown. In this example, the normal opening result, which is the number of times of opening once, is changed to the special opening result, which is the number of times of opening of 2 times shown in the second embodiment, so that the overlap with the V allocation occurs. An example is shown, and the opening/closing accessory 168 displaced to the open state at the timing of t2 is temporarily closed at the timing of t2.3, and is then displaced again to the open state at the timing of t2.4. The timing of t2.4 is earlier than the overlapping timing with the V winning (timing from 5 to t6). Then, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t4.2.

As the opening/closing pattern after the change, pattern 5 shows an example in which the opening/closing pattern is changed so that the V winning can be performed on the normal route due to the positional relationship of the rotating body 201. More specifically, the current position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 is grasped, and the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 reaches the deriving portion 186 from the rotation speed of the rotating body 201. The period is calculated, and based on the calculation result and the time required for the gaming ball that has won the accessory device 150 to reach the deriving unit 186, the opening/closing timing at which the V winning is possible on the normal route is calculated backward. For example, the opening/closing timing is changed such that the opening/closing timing calculated as the back-calculated opening/closing timing is changed to the open state at the timing of t2.5 and then to the closed state at the timing of t4.3.

It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned change patterns is only an example, and may be changed to another opening/closing pattern. In short, if it is determined that the V prize does not occur on the normal route, the opening/closing pattern may be changed to increase the possibility of the V prize.

In FIG. 53, when there is a possibility that a V prize is generated by both the normal route and the V distribution by the second distribution member 310, that is, a positive determination is made in step S2107 and a positive determination is made in step S2111. The case is shown. For example, it is assumed that the opening/closing timing is provisionally set such that the pending information is consumed at the timing of t1, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2, and is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 (( Processing of step S2102). Further, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and the overlap with the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state occurs. Further, the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201 is also arranged at a position where the V winning can be made on the normal route by the opening/closing pattern which is temporarily set at present.

In this case, in step S2112, as the temporary change process, for example, a process of temporarily changing the open/close standby time to the open state at the timing of t2.1 after delaying the open/close standby time by a predetermined time (0.5 sec) is executed. In this example, the timing of t2.1 is later than the timing of performing V allocation (timing from t3 to t4), and there is no possibility of V winning due to V allocation in the opening/closing pattern after the temporary change. Further, the opening/closing accessory 168 is displaced to the open state at the timing of t2.1, and then is displaced to the closed state at the timing of t6 similarly to the above. That is, in this example, the period in which the open state is maintained becomes short. Then, in step S2113, it is determined whether or not the V winning is possible in the normal route in the temporarily changed opening/closing pattern, based on the position of the V winning opening guide portion 204 of the rotating body 201, and the tentatively changed. When it is determined that V winning can be performed by the normal route even with the opening/closing pattern, the second opening/closing timing changing process of setting the temporarily changed opening/closing pattern as the current opening/closing pattern is executed in step S2114. As a result, the opening/closing timing is changed so that only the possibility of V winning on the normal route remains.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship with the position of the rotating body 201 when the holding information is consumed as the predetermined event. It is possible to change the V winning rate in consideration of not only the operation patterns of 300 and 310 but also the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, and it is possible to diversify the opening/closing pattern to be set. In this case, since only the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is changed without changing the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 or the operation pattern of the rotating body 201, the player is given an unfair feeling. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Based on the result of grasping the position of the rotating body 201, it is determined whether or not the V winning is possible on the normal route, and if it is not possible, the opening/closing pattern may be changed (the first opening/closing timing changing process is performed). Can be implemented). As a result, by changing the opening/closing pattern, the V winning rate can be improved, and the player can expect the opening/closing execution mode.

Regarding this first opening/closing timing changing process, a changing lottery process is performed, and when the changing lottery is won, the changing process is performed. However, for the changing lottery, for example, the winning probability differs depending on the gaming state or the like. It may be configured. Specifically, the number of stored hold information, the number of game times exhausted after the open/close execution mode (the exhausted number of hold information), the number of prizes to the operation ports 38 and 39 after the open/close execution mode, per unit time The winning probability is different depending on the V winning rate (occurrence rate of the opening/closing execution mode), the ball-out rate per unit time (the rate of the number of game balls fired and the number of prize balls paid out), etc. May be

Even if the temporarily set opening/closing pattern is an opening/closing pattern in which V distribution can be performed even if V winning is possible on the normal route, the temporary changing process is performed and the temporary changing process is performed after the temporary changing. Even if the V winning is possible on the normal route, the second opening/closing timing changing process for changing the opening/closing pattern after the provisional change is executed. As a result, when a V winning is generated, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence on the normal route instead of the V distribution. Here, when the game ball enters the accessory device 150, reaches the ball distributing portion 185 of the guide passage 183, and then is distributed to the warp passage 250, it cannot be distributed to the warp passage 250 (that is, the normal route is changed). The visibility of the game ball is lower than that when the game ball passes). In other words, when the game ball is distributed to the warp passage 250, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the operation mode of the game ball from the front of the gaming machine than when the game ball is not distributed to the warp passage 250. The game balls distributed to the warp passage 250 are derived so as to win V as they are, while the game balls not distributed to the warp passage 250 are subsequently distributed by the first distribution member 300. Minutes and the distribution by the rotating body 201, the V prize is won. Therefore, from the viewpoint of paying attention to the operation mode of the game ball, it is easier to enhance the effect of paying attention to the operation mode when the game ball is not assigned to the warp passage 250 than when the game ball is assigned to the warp passage 250. Therefore, as described above, when both the normal route and the V distribution are possible, the opening and closing timing may be changed on condition that the V prize can be generated on the normal route even after the change. For example, the rate of occurrence of V winnings on the normal route side can be increased, and interest in the operation mode of the game ball can be increased.

In the above configuration, after the temporary change, whether or not V allocation can occur, that is, whether or not the time when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state and the time when V allocation can be performed overlap with each other. Alternatively, the opening/closing pattern may be changed so that the V winning can be performed on the normal route and the V distribution cannot occur. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably achieve the effect that the V winning is generated on the normal route side. However, in this case, there is a concern that the processing load will increase extremely. On the other hand, as in the above-described configuration, regardless of whether or not V allocation occurs after the temporary change, if only the normal route side is the determination target, the normal route is suppressed while suppressing an increase in processing load. It is possible to obtain an effect by the V winning being generated on the side.

By performing the second opening/closing timing changing process as described above, the total V winning rate can be lowered. Specifically, since the opening/closing pattern that allows V winnings on both the normal route and V allocation can be changed to an opening/closing pattern that allows V winnings only on the normal route, The V winning rate can be lowered by the amount of. Therefore, for example, when such a second opening/closing timing changing process is performed, it is preferable that the privilege be given accordingly. Specifically, when the open/close execution mode generated in the situation where the second open/close timing changing process is performed is such that the 16R continuous mode is easily selected, or when the second open/close timing changing process is performed, After that, a configuration in which the probability that the first opening/closing timing changing process is performed is high (the probability of winning the changing lottery process in step S2108 is high) is conceivable. By doing so, it is possible to suitably compensate for the decrease in the V winning rate, while having the effect of performing the second opening/closing timing changing process.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the hold information is consumed as the occurrence of the predetermined event in which the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 are set has been described as an example, but the start of the round game in the open/close execution mode is the predetermined event. May occur. In this case, for example, the opening/closing pattern (A to C) set in each round is set as a temporarily set opening/closing pattern, and the possibility of occurrence of V prize on the normal route in the temporarily set opening/closing pattern is grasped. Alternatively, the provisionally set meter closing pattern may be changed.

In this case, for example, in the change lottery process, the winning probability may be changed depending on the number of rounds of the opening/closing execution mode, or the winning probability may be changed depending on the number of times of opening/closing (RC2) in one round. For example, if the number of times of opening and closing in one round is set so that the winning probability is lower when the number of times of opening and closing is small than when it is large, a V prize is generated with a small number of times of opening and closing in one round, and the winning upper limit number is reached. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the round is finished even if the round is not satisfied.

Further, as a privilege for compensating for the decrease in the V winning rate due to the second opening/closing timing changing process being performed, the number of times the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed during one round can be changed to a subsequent change lottery process. It may be configured such that the probability of winning is high. That is, the more the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed, the easier the first opening/closing timing changing process is performed, and the V winning rate is lowered when the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed. Also, it is possible to raise interest in the operation mode of the game ball while increasing the subsequent V winning rate and preventing the round continuation rate from decreasing (while increasing the round continuation rate).

As described above, in the configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed according to the number of times the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed, the change lottery in the one round is performed according to the number of times the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed in one round. When the winning probability of the process is increased, the probability that a V winning (continuation of round) will occur when the rear side is opened and closed in one round can be made higher than that when the first side is opened and closed. This not only prevents the inconvenience that the number of rounds is updated and the number of rounds is updated early in each round, but also makes it possible to expect V winnings on the normal route when the number of times of opening and closing is small in one round. It is possible to realize a novel game in which the operation mode of the game ball is enjoyed, and the V distribution tends to occur as the number of times of opening and closing increases and the end of the round is approached.

In addition, in a configuration in which the round continuation rate is changed depending on the number of times the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed, the number of times the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed is reflected in the winning probability of the change lottery process in the next and subsequent rounds. With the configuration, the case where the V prize is won (the round is continued) on the normal route is treated more favorably than the case where the V prize is given (the round is continued) by the V allocation, and the operation mode of the game ball This makes it possible to attract more attention. For example, the winning probability of the change lottery process may be increased in the subsequent rounds based on the number of times the second opening/closing timing change process is performed being equal to or greater than the predetermined number, or high continuation in the subsequent rounds. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability that the opening/closing pattern A that becomes a rate is selected becomes high.

In addition, not only the number of times the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed, but also the number of times the V winning (round continuation) occurs after the second opening/closing timing changing process is performed is reflected in the subsequent round continuation rate. May be

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-described embodiments, or part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is secured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by combining the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, it is possible to win a prize in the accessory device 150 based on a prize in the operating openings 38, 39, and an opening/closing execution mode is performed when the prize-winning game ball further wins in the V winning opening 182a. In the gaming machine that shifts to, the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed by the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201, but the operation of the game ball in the accessory device 150 is changed. The configuration to be changed is not limited to the above. For example, the configuration may be such that at least one of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not provided, or the configuration in which the rotating body 201 is not provided. In short, in a configuration in which gaming balls that have won a prize in the accessory device 150 are distributed to the V winning opening 182a or the escape opening 182b, the distribution may be distributed by a distribution unit that performs a predetermined operation. ..

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is different as the configuration for changing the winning timing for the accessory device 150. It suffices that the subsequent V winning rate can be changed by changing the V winning rate, and the V winning rate is changed by changing the operation pattern of the other winning role instead of the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing role thing 168. It may be configured. However, if the other accessory is the accessory in the accessory device 150, an event occurs in which the player won the prize in the accessory device 150 but does not win the V prize due to a change in the operation pattern of the other accessory. Therefore, the player may feel unfair. Therefore, it is preferable that the other accessory is an object other than the accessory device 150 that changes the winning timing of the prize device 150.

(3) Although the operation start of the distribution members 300 and 310 is the opening timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, other timing may be used as long as it is a timing when a predetermined specific event (predetermined event) occurs. .. That is, it may be the start timing of the round game, or the opening and closing of the opening/closing accessory 168, or the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the round game.

(4) In the first embodiment, in the open/close execution mode of the continuous rate changing mode, the eighth round is the open/close pattern B and the eleventh round is the open/close pattern C, and the continuous rate is low in these rounds. The configuration of the opening/closing pattern of each round is not limited to the above. For example, all the rounds after the predetermined round such as the eighth round may be set as the low continuation rounds such as the opening/closing pattern B, or all the rounds up to the predetermined round may be set as the low continuation rounds and the continuation after the predetermined round may be set as the high continuation. It may be a round (opening/closing pattern A). Further, an open/close pattern that is easier to continue (higher V winning probability) than the open/close pattern A, or an open/close pattern that is more difficult to continue (lower V winning probability) than B and C may be set. By including the rounds of these opening/closing patterns in the opening/closing patterns of each round, the opening/closing patterns can be diversified.

Further, the open/close patterns of all rounds may be set to open/close patterns (open/close patterns B and C) that are difficult to continue. In this case, all the rounds may be the open/close pattern B, all the rounds may be the open/close pattern C, the open/close pattern that is less likely to continue than the open/close patterns B and C, or a combination thereof. Good.

Further, conversely, the open/close pattern of all rounds may be an open/close pattern (open/close pattern A) that is easy to continue.

The open/close execution mode configured by the above open/close patterns may be changed to the open/close execution mode of the open/close execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode in the first embodiment, or all or any of the open/close execution modes. It may be added, or the respective open/close execution modes may be combined and added to the first embodiment.

(5) In the second embodiment, the V winning probability is changed by changing the pattern of opening and closing twice (opening and closing based on winning in the second operation port 39), but opening and closing once. The pattern may be changed or the number of times of opening and closing may be changed. For example, in the configuration in which the opening/closing pattern is changed once, the opening time is set so that the normal opening result is an operation pattern that is less likely to be distributed to the V winning side by the distribution members 300 and 310. Then, the opening time of the opening/closing winning object may be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distributing members 300 and 310 so that the opening/closing member can be easily distributed to the V winning side.

(6) As a configuration in which the V winning probability is changed (the opening/closing pattern is changed) depending on the game result as in the second embodiment, the result of changing the game state (special open A result or special open B result) The probabilities of may differ.

(7) The configuration for increasing the V winning probability as the configuration for changing the V winning probability by changing the opening/closing pattern has been described in detail, but the configuration for decreasing the V winning probability may be used.

(8) Even if the distribution members 300 and 310 are not provided, even if an opening/closing pattern is provided by making the opening/closing pattern different, a V prize is almost won if the prize device device 150 is won (distributed to the V winning side). Good. In this case, it is preferable to determine the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 by grasping the rotational position of the rotating body 201. Even in this configuration, the V winning probability can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201.

(9) As the configuration for changing the V winning probability by grasping the rotational position of the rotating body 201 and changing the opening/closing pattern, for example, the following configuration can be considered.

As a game result (result table) based on winning in the operating ports 38, 39, a special open C result that can change the opening/closing pattern is provided. When the special opening C result is obtained, the position of the rotating body 201 is grasped based on the detection result of the rotational position detection sensor 196. For example, when a game ball that has won a prize device device 150 is not distributed to the distribution members 300 and 310, the period from the derivation unit 186 to the recess 182 (ball guide unit 202) is the arrival period. Then, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is set based on the relationship between the arrival period and the period in which the V winning opening guide unit 204 rotates to the position corresponding to the deriving unit 186. In this way, it is possible to set a pattern in which a V winning is likely to occur when the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open state, without changing the operation pattern of the rotating body 201.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, it takes about 0.3 sec for the game ball that has won the accessory device 150 to reach the position to be sorted by the second sorting member 310, and the first sorting member The passage length is set so that it takes about 0.2 sec from the position on the second distributing member 310 side to reach the position to be distributed by 300. However, this structure should be changed. Also according to the above, the probability of being distributed to the out side depending on the relationship between the period in which the opening/closing accessory 168 is in the open/closed state and the period in which the distribution members 300 and 310 are in the distribution state as described above. It is also possible to change the probability of being distributed to the V winning side.

(11) In the above embodiment, the mode of support by the electric accessory 39a is set so as not to be different, but a plurality of types of support modes may be set so that the mode of support is different. In detail, for example, as a support mode, when comparing in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted to the game area in the same manner, the electric accessory 39a of the second operation port 39 is opened per unit period. The low frequency support mode (or low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (or high frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high or low.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 39a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set to be longer. ing. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, the electric power open state is elected, and when the electric accessory 39a is opened a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The period is set shorter than one open period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the minimum securing period (that is, The one-time display continuation period on the accessory display unit 44 is set to be short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 39 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, the probability that the accessory device 150 is in the open state is high, and the probability of winning the V prize (generation of a big hit) is also high. Further, as in the second embodiment, in the configuration in which not only the number of times the opening/closing accessory 168 is opened but also the game result (big hit type) is made different by the first operating port 38 and the second operating port 39, In the mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the winning probability to the two working ports 39 is increased, the game result (big hit type, special opening A, B in the second embodiment) set for the second working port 39 is obtained. The probability increases. Furthermore, if a prize is frequently generated in the second working port 39, a prize ball accompanying it can be obtained frequently, and as a player, the player does not reduce the number of balls he or she holds during the high frequency support mode. You can play while playing. In this way, by utilizing the height of the support mode, the degree of advantage can be changed and the game can be diversified.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode being in the electric role open state per unit period is higher than that of the low frequency support mode, and is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured such that the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a securing period that is ensured when one electric lottery opening lottery is performed and the next electric ones open lottery is performed (for example, on the role substance display unit 44 based on the winning of the through gate 41). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display periods are executed, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing period is easier to select or the average securing period is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the period of opening is lengthened, and the securing period that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is concerned. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be enhanced by applying any one condition or a condition of any combination of shortening the average period of the securing period and increasing the winning probability. ..

(12) In the above-described second embodiment, the first operation port 38 and the second operation port 39 have different game result tables, so that high and low advantages are produced. The same result table may be used as in the embodiment. Specifically, the special opening A result and the special opening B result may be provided in the result table for the first working port. In this case, despite the fact that the player has won the first working opening 38, the opening is actually performed twice, which makes the player feel good, and the special opening A result and the special opening B result are obtained. Since the V winning probability increases, even if it is difficult for the second operating port 39 to win, it is expected that a special opening A result will be obtained by winning the first operating port 38 side. It becomes possible.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, description will be made on the premise that the hold information is acquired based on the winning of each of the operation ports 38 and 39, and the hold information is stored with a predetermined number (four each) as an upper limit. However, the configuration may be such that the hold information is not stored. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration. However, in the configuration in which the hold information is not stored as described above, for example, when the winning of the working ports 38, 39 occurs again during the control of the accessory device 150 based on the winning of the working ports 38, 39, etc. Since the opening/closing member 168 is not opened for the winning of the winning holes in the operating ports 38, 39, the player may feel lost, and the interest in the game is reduced. It can happen. Further, in the above-described embodiment, during the opening/closing execution mode, not only the accessory device 150 but also the operation ports 38, 39 can be won. Therefore, in the configuration on the side where the hold information is stored, if the hold information for that amount is consumed after the opening/closing execution mode and the opening/closing of the opening/closing accessory 168 is accompanied by the completion of the hold information, a V prize is generated. Execution mode will be continuous. As a result, the game can be played on the premise of the occurrence of the condominium, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. However, as a predetermined state, for example, during control of the accessory device 150, or when a prize is generated in the operation ports 38, 39 during the opening/closing execution mode, the hold information is acquired, and in other cases. May be configured not to acquire the hold information. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling lost when a prize is awarded to the operating ports 38, 39 during the control of the accessory device 150 or the opening/closing execution mode as described above. ..

Further, as a game result of the suspension information acquired during the above-mentioned predetermined state, a special opening A result or a special opening B result may be easily obtained. Generally, the player expects to win a prize for the opening/closing accessory 168 while the opening/closing accessory 168 is open. Then, if the holding information is acquired as described above when the opening/closing accessory 168 does not win during the opening of the opening/closing accessory 168, it means that the opening/closing accessory 168 does not win. Even so, it can be expected to win a prize in the operating ports 38, 39. Further, if the game result based on the winning is the special opening A result or the special opening B result (the result of the opening/closing pattern in which V winning is likely to occur) as described above, the opening/closing combination is performed during the opening of the opening/closing combination object 168. It is possible to make a novel game in which it is expected that not only the object 168 side but also the operation ports 38 and 39 are won. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the interest.

(14) In the above embodiment, the opening/closing patterns A1 to A2, B1 to B3, C1 to C2, the special opening A result and the special opening B result, and the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing accessory 168 are made different so that the accessory works. Although the V winning probability is changed without changing the operation pattern of each drive unit 300, 310, 201 in the device 150, the opening/closing pattern and the operation pattern of each drive unit 300, 310, 201 are examples. Therefore, the V winning probability may be changed by combining other patterns.

(15) In the second embodiment described above, the V winning probability is maintained without making the first opening start timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 in the special opening A result or the special opening B result different from other cases (normal opening result). However, the V winning probability may be changed by changing the first opening start timing. In this case, for example, in the case of the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the opening timing according to the operation pattern of each drive unit 300, 310, 201 in the accessory device 150 is set regardless of the opening type counter CS. It may be configured to be set. If the opening timing is informed by, for example, the symbol display device 51 or the like (character display such as "let's win the prize after XX seconds!"), the attention to the game can be further enhanced. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the opening timing is not notified (only the result of special opening A and B such as "A chance if you win!"), it is possible to suppress aiming and V winning according to the skill level of the player. It is possible to secure the fairness of the game by eliminating the high and low rates.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 81 includes a detection unit (sensor) that detects fraudulent activity, and a unit that executes a corresponding process based on the detection result (for example, normally started regularly). (Added as one process in the process). In particular, in the above-described embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode is started by the V prize to the accessory device 150, and the round game can be continued by the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to illegally generate the V prize to the accessory device 150. is assumed. This action may be due to magnetism, radio waves, or vibration, for example, and a detection sensor for detecting them (magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc.) is provided, and the progress of the game is stopped based on the detection result of the detection sensor. It is advisable to adopt a configuration in which a notification to the game hall and a notification to the game hall (external output) are performed. Further, in the second embodiment, since the opening/closing pattern in which the V winning probability is increased is set, the opening/closing pattern is set, that is, the winning (detection by the sensor 39c) to the second operation port 39 is illegal. Illegally winning a prize (detection by the sensor 39c) to the second operation port 39 at a timing at which the special opening A result or the special opening B result is likely to occur by performing an action to cause the special opening A or the updating cycle of the jackpot random number counter C1 by some method. It is also envisioned that the act will occur in. That is, by providing a configuration (a sensor for detecting magnetism, radio waves, vibrations, etc. and means for performing processing based on the detection result) that suppresses the act of illegally generating an opening/closing pattern that increases the V winning probability as described above, While increasing the winning probability and improving the interest, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally generating it.

(17) In the case of the configuration in which the height of the support state by the electric accessory 39a is not provided as in each of the above-described embodiments, the electric accessory 39a or the through gate 41 itself may not be provided. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the configuration.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, in the opening/closing control during the normal gaming state, when a V winning is generated, the V winning flag is set (step S1104), the opening/closing control is ended, and the opening/closing execution mode is directly performed. However, the opening/closing control may be continued even if a V winning occurs. In this way, during the opening/closing control, a prize may be awarded to the accessory device 150 even after the V prize is won, and the prize is likely to occur to the accessory device 150 (that is, a privilege based on the prize, a prize ball). However, since a V prize has occurred, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event that makes the accessory device 150 unable to win the prize and makes the player feel lost. On the other hand, when a V prize is generated, it is notified immediately, and the configuration that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode is closer to the V winning occurrence timing and the opening/closing execution mode generation timing. It becomes clear whether or not a V prize has been generated by the ball and the mode has shifted to the open/close execution mode, and as a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the operation mode of the game ball. Therefore, in order to solve these contradictory problems, for example, by grasping the operation patterns of the rotating body 201 and the distribution members 300 and 310, and opening/closing control based on one piece of pending information, a prize is awarded to the accessory device 150. The opening/closing pattern may be set such that the V winning rate is higher when the timing occurs later (second timing) than when the timing occurs first (first timing). With this configuration, the V prize is generated more easily in the later timing of the opening/closing control, and after the V prize is generated, the prize may be further awarded to the accessory device 150. It is possible to make itself less likely to occur.

(19) The timing at which the V winning occurs may be set in relation to the firing cycle of the game ball. More specifically, for example, assuming that the open/closed accessory 168 in the accessory device 150 is maintained in the open state for a period (eg, 0.3 sec) shorter than the game cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, It is difficult for a prize to be won in the accessory device 150 during the period in which the open state is maintained. However, for example, even if the period shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball is set as the period for maintaining the open state, it may reach the character device device 150 in the just-open state depending on the firing timing of the game ball. In some cases, you can get (win prizes). As described above, if a prize is won in the accessory device 150, the V winning rate is changed depending on the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 in the accessory device 150. Therefore, in the opening/closing timing setting process, the firing cycle of the game ball is grasped, the possibility of winning the prize device device 150 is grasped based on the firing cycle, and the V winning rate is changed based on that. It is preferable that the opening/closing pattern is set so as to be set.

(20) The entrance sensors 179 may be provided in correspondence with the left and right opening/closing accessories 168, respectively. That is, in each of the above-described embodiments, the same entrance sensor 179 is used to detect which prize is given to the accessory device 150 from any of the opening/closing accessories 168. It may be configured to detect the winning of the game ball by separate entrance sensors. In this way, when a prize is won in the accessory device 150, it can be detected more quickly, and in the configuration in which the V winning rate is different depending on the left and right winning routes, the corresponding notification ( For example, when a prize is won from the winning route on the side where the V-win is easy, a notification to that effect can be given. More specifically, in the above embodiment, the first distribution member 300 is provided on the left side of the guide passage 183. For example, the rate of distribution to the left guide passage 183 differs depending on the left and right winning paths. In this case, it is considered that the player is more interested in winning from the winning route having a higher rate of being distributed to the guide passage 183 on the right side. Therefore, if the winning is notified after the winning, the player does not have to be always interested in the movement of the game ball, and the player can enjoy the game leisurely. In such a configuration in which the V winning rate is different depending on the left and right winning paths, the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 and the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing accessory 168 can be changed without changing the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 as in the above-described embodiment. By applying the invention in which the V winning rate is changed by changing the opening/closing pattern, the V winning rate can be changed more strictly, and the game can be diversified.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game balls that have been distributed (V distributed) by the second distribution member 310 are always V-winned, but a part of the game balls is placed on the out side. Good.

(22) As the result (game result) of the hit/miss judgment, in addition to the normal opening result, the disconnection result, the direct hit result, the special opening A result and the special opening B result having the same opening number but different opening and closing patterns are provided. However, other results may be provided. For example, a result of different opening times (a result of opening twice in the result table for the first working opening, a result of opening once in the result table for the second working opening), or opening with the same opening times It is also possible to provide a result in which the period in which the state is maintained is different (result of longer or shorter than normal). Even if these results are used, the V winning rate can be adjusted based on the relationship between the period in which the open state is maintained as a result and the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201.

(23) In the normal game state, the open/close pattern is made different by using the result of the judgment (game result), but the following structure may be applied. For example, a counter that determines whether or not the game is won and a counter that determines the type of game result are provided. Then, in the determination using the counter that performs the winning/disapproving determination, it is determined only whether or not to be in the open state, and in the determination using the counter that determines the type of the game result, the type of the opening/closing pattern (that is, the second execution Whether to open normally like a form or special open). By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration of each determination process, and, for example, in the configuration that executes the prefetching notification using the hold information, only the release result is given as the prefetching notification. In the case of the configuration that gives the notification, only the counter for determining whether the hold information is valid or not has to be read, and the configuration relating to the prefetch notification can be simplified.

(24) As the hold information, the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired at the time of winning a prize in the operating ports 38, 39, and the type (opening type) of the opening/closing execution mode is determined using the jackpot type counter C2. It is also possible to obtain a counter for determining the type of the opening/closing execution mode at the time of V winning and determine the type of the opening/closing execution mode based on the counter. By doing so, it is possible to omit the process of acquiring the counter used at the time of V winning at the time of winning at the operation ports 38 and 39, even though V winning has not occurred, and the processing configuration is simple. Can be promoted. However, for example, when deciding the opening/closing pattern, a configuration that reflects the type of the opening/closing execution mode at the time of V winning, specifically, for example, in the 16R continuous mode, the V winning rate is increased/decreased, in the continuous variation mode. If there is a configuration such that the V winning rate is increased/decreased, it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening/closing execution mode is acquired as the hold information. Further, at the time of executing the opening/closing control or in the pre-reading notification, a configuration for notifying the type of the opening/closing execution mode in the case of V winning at the opening/closing control corresponding to the hold information (for example, “If you hit here, 16R continuous mode get! In the case of "display" and the like), it is preferable that the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the type of the opening/closing execution mode is acquired as the hold information.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the opening/closing execution mode is started by detecting the V winning in the winning process in the game control process. However, the opening/closing execution mode may be changed as follows. That is, the first round in the opening/closing execution mode is started based on the winning of the operation openings 38 and 39, and in the game control process, the presence or absence of the continuation of the first round is determined by the presence or absence of the V winning. To do. In this case, in the first round (RC1) of the opening/closing execution mode based on the winning of the first operating port 38, the round game with one opening number (RC2) is easily executed, and the winning of the second operating port 39 In the first round (RC1) of the opening/closing execution mode based on, the round game with the number of times of opening (RC2) is set to be easily executed. Then, in each of the number of times of opening and closing in the opening and closing execution mode based on the winning of each of the operation ports 38 and 39, the opening/closing accessory 168 does not change the operation patterns of the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201. By varying the opening and closing patterns of V, the V winning rate is varied and the continuation rate of the round game is varied. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain unique effects due to the above-described characteristic configurations.

(26) In each of the above-described embodiments, the order in which the holding information based on the winning of the first working opening 38 and the holding information based on the winning of the second working opening 39 are used (the order of the object of judgment). Although the holding information based on the winning in the second operation port 39 is prioritized, the holding information may be acquired in the order of acquisition. For example, it is more advantageous to determine whether or not the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 39 is winning than the determination of whether or not the holding information is based on the winning of the first operating port 38. (Which can be set), the player has a feeling that the player may want to execute the winning/absence determination with respect to the hold information based on the winning of the second operating port 39 as in the above embodiment. There is also a feeling that it is postponed (the opening/closing pattern in which V winning is likely to occur is left behind), and whether or not the hold information based on the winning of the first operating port 38 is judged is executed first. By entrusting such shaking feeling of the player to a random order that the player does not intend, such as a winning order to the first operating opening 38 and the second operating opening 39, the game is made more diverse. It becomes possible.

Further, if the configuration in which the winning rate to the second operating port 39 is made different by using the height of the support mode of the electric accessory 39a is applied, the hold based on the winning to the second operating port 39 as in each of the above embodiments. In the configuration in which the hit/no hit judgment of information is prioritized, since the winning of the second working opening 39 occurs frequently, the order of the hit/no hit judgment of the pending information based on the winning of the first working opening 38 can be continuously lowered. There may be a large difference between the timing of winning the prize for the first operation opening 38 and the timing of determining whether or not the pending information is held based on the winning. If the gap between the prize winning timing and the timing of the win/loss determination becomes large, for example, even if a fraudulent act such as making the win/win determination is executed even if no win has occurred, the manager of the gaming hall will It can be difficult to spot it. In addition, delaying the discovery of fraudulent behavior may facilitate fraudulent behavior. Therefore, as described above, by adopting a configuration in which the prize determination is performed in the winning order, it is possible to minimize the deviation between the prize winning timing and the prize determination timing, and as a result, it is possible to prevent fraud in advance. Become.

(27) As an example of the configuration in which the maximum number of pieces of the hold information based on the winning prizes in the respective operation ports 38 and 39 is stored as 4 as an upper limit, the number may be less than 3, or 5 The number may be more than one, or the upper limit storage number of the hold information based on winning in each of the operation ports 38 and 39 may be different. For example, each of the operation ports 38 and 39 may be configured to be able to store one hold information. In this way, for example, the possibility of inviting a condominium after the opening/closing execution mode due to too much reservation information being accumulated during the opening/closing execution mode is reduced, and the range of increase/decrease in the number of balls is reduced to provide a mild gameplay. It becomes possible.

(28) The holding light emitting units 54 to 56 may be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Where the symbol display device 51 is provided on the upper part of the accessory device 150, the player moves the game ball centering on the accessory device 150 such as winning the prize device 150 and then winning the V prize. It is considered that the user has a high interest in the aspect, and if the number of the hold information is displayed at a place close to the place of such an interest (that is, the display screen G), it will naturally come into view. it is conceivable that. By doing so, it is possible to consolidate the information and make the game easier to understand as compared with a configuration in which different notifications are made using various locations. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the open/close execution mode is entered, the type of the open/close execution mode (15R continuous mode, continuous variable mode) is notified on the display screen G, and the hold number is notified on the display screen G. According to the configuration, when notifying the type of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of the information on the reserved number is erased, or the type of the opening/closing execution mode is notified while leaving the information on the reserved number. In the case of the former, it may be inconvenient to check the number of hold information while the type of the open/close execution mode is being notified, and in the case of the latter, the effect area may become small. Therefore, there is a possibility that the notification of the type of the opening/closing execution mode itself may be unobtrusive. Therefore, for example, if the display screen G is configured to display the number of hold information even though the hold light emitting units 54 to 56 are provided, even if the display of the number of hold information on the display screen G is deleted, Can be confirmed by the holding light emitting parts 54 to 56, and various information can be suitably displayed in time.

(29) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the game control process, the subsequent hold information is not consumed while in the accessory control state, but it may be changed as follows. That is, in the accessory control state, it is determined whether or not a game ball wins in the accessory device 150, and whether or not the game ball is detected by the V prize sensor 192 or the detachment sensor 193, That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball won in the accessory device 150 is still present in the accessory device 150, and if it is present in the accessory device 150, the opening/closing accessory 168 is closed. Even if the control state has ended, the following hold information is not consumed. By doing so, it is possible to raise the awareness of watching the prize for each accessory device 150 more carefully, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

(30) In each of the above-described embodiments, the V game prize is given to the accessory device 150, and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, the prize is easily generated to the accessory device 150. However, the opening/closing execution mode may be executed by another winning apparatus. For example, a variable ball entrance device capable of displacing a game ball flowing down through the game area between an open state in which it can enter and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter is provided, and V to the accessory device 150 is provided. The main controller 81 controls the variable ball entrance device to open based on the occurrence of a prize. Then, the open/close execution mode of the 16R continuous mode may be configured to be executed by the variable winning device, or the open/close execution mode of the continuous variation mode may be configured to be executed by the variable winning device. In the former case, for the continuous variation mode, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing accessory 168 is made different so as to make the V winning rate in the accessory device 150 different, and the continuation rate of the round game is adjusted. It is possible. In the latter case, a V winning opening and a non-winning winning opening are provided in the variable winning device, and a distribution unit that distributes winnings to each winning opening is provided upstream of each winning opening. The distribution unit is operated according to a predetermined operation pattern so that the game balls that have won the variable winning device are distributed to the V winning opening and the off winning opening. Then, as the continuous variation mode, the switching timing between the open state and the closed state is changed so as to change the winning timing of the variable winning device without changing the operation pattern of the distributing unit, and the winning combination is transferred to the V winning opening. Adjust the winning rate of. In this way, instead of or in addition to the configuration of changing the continuation rate of the round game in the accessory device 150, it is possible to realize it by another winning device.

(31) The game ball subjected to V distribution by the second distribution member 310 is led out to the warp passage 250 as a region in which the visibility from the front of the game machine is lower than that. The V winning may be generated by passing through an area where the visibility from the front does not change, or the V winning may be generated by passing through an area where the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is improved. By doing so, it is possible to easily confirm that the V distribution has been performed, not only by reducing the visibility of the game ball but also by the subsequent operation mode of the game ball. In particular, in a configuration in which the greatest attention is paid to whether or not a V prize is generated, such as the pachinko machine 10, it is easier to increase the attention by making the V allocation more prominent. It is supposed to be. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the visibility from the front of the gaming machine does not decrease (does not change/improves) at the time of V allocation as in the above configuration, it is possible to fully visually recognize the subsequent movement of the game ball. It is preferable to increase the attention.

However, from the viewpoint of suppressing the action of aiming so as to intentionally generate the V allocation, the visibility of the game ball after the V allocation is performed and the location where the V allocation is performed ( It is preferable not to increase the visibility of the area where the second distribution member 310 is provided) too much.

In that respect, in each of the above-described embodiments, the V distribution by the second distribution member 310 having relatively low visibility from the front of the gaming machine and the first distribution member 300 having relatively high visibility from the front of the gaming machine. Since the V winning rate is changed by the combination of the out-of-range distribution and the operation patterns of the both distribution members 300 and 310, the inconvenience due to the reduction in the visibility from the front of the gaming machine is caused by the first distribution member 300. By covering the problem and improving the visibility from the front of the gaming machine by covering it with the second distribution member 310, and coexisting both, it is possible to compensate for the disadvantages of high and low visibility. Has become.

(32) The game ball that has won the accessory device 150 is discharged to the outside of the accessory device 150 by the V winning passage 191a or the removal passage 191b, and the discharged game ball is a pachinko machine through a discharge passage (not shown). Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of 10, it may be configured to be discharged to the game area as the outside of the accessory device 150.

(33) By changing the opening/closing waiting time and the variation display time of the game times, the distribution members 300 and 310 and the rotating body 201 from the end of the opening/closing execution mode and the end of the opening/closing execution mode as the occurrence of a predetermined event The V winning rate in the accessory device 150 is changed without changing the operation pattern. However, as in the second embodiment, the opening and closing pattern of the double opening is used to open the first and second open states. The V winning rate can be increased by applying different configurations for different periods of time that are maintained, or changing the waiting time between the first and second open states and the open state, individually or in combination. The configuration may be changed.

(34) In the ninth embodiment, the larger the common hold number CRN, the shorter the variable display time, and as a result, the configuration is likely to overlap with the V allocation, but the timing when the V allocation is performed May be set to be slower, and the overlapping with the V allocation may be more likely to occur as the variable display time becomes longer. In this case, the larger the common hold number CRN, the longer the variable display time may be, and the larger the common hold number CRN, the longer the period in which the open/closed accessory 168 is maintained in the open state is set. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which overlap with the minutes easily occurs.

(35) In the ninth embodiment, the variable display time is set according to the common hold number CRN regardless of the game state, but a mode in which the variable display time is set according to the common hold number CRN is set. A mode other than that may be set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), as the jackpot type, a jackpot result of shifting to the open/close execution mode of the 2R continuous mode is set in addition to the 16R continuous mode and the continuous variation mode in each of the above embodiments. .. In the opening/closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode, the round game is an opening/closing execution mode that is performed only twice (or only once). For example, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by V winning in the second round, the opening/closing execution mode is It shall end. Therefore, it is assumed that the open/close execution mode of the 2R continuous mode provides less prize balls than the other open/close execution modes.

FIG. 54(b) is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process of this modification. The variable display time setting process is a process executed in step S1706 of the game control process (FIG. 45).

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the current game state is the special mode. The special mode is a mode set when the previous opening/closing execution mode is the 2R continuation mode described above, and is set in the ending processing (step S1215) of the opening/closing execution mode in the game state transition processing (FIG. 23). To be done. If the current game state is not the special mode, a process of setting a predetermined time (for example, 0.7 sec) set in advance as the variable display time is executed in step S2202, and this setting process is ended. In this case, if a prize is won in the accessory device 150 immediately after the opening operation of the opening/closing accessory 168 starts, V allocation may occur, but otherwise V allocation does not occur.

On the other hand, if the current game state is the special mode, the variable display time (see FIG. 46(a)) corresponding to the common hold number CRN is set in step S2203, and then this setting process ends. As described above, the larger the common hold number CRN, the more the variable display time in which V allocation is likely to occur can be selected. Since the common hold number CRN tends to increase during the opening/closing execution mode (holding information is likely to be accumulated), the occurrence rate of the opening/closing execution mode is increased by setting the special mode.

By doing so, even after the opening/closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode, which is not advantageous to the player, it becomes easier to shift to the opening/closing execution mode after that, and the unfavorable compensation can be performed.

In the above configuration, in the 2R continuation mode, it is preferable that the round game is continued until the maximum number of winnings is reached even if a V winning occurs during the round game. By doing so, the common hold number CRN is likely to increase during the opening/closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to anticipate the condominium after the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, in the above-described configuration, a distribution table for each mode may be provided so that the 2R continuation mode can be easily selected in the V winning (the big hit is generated) during the special mode. By doing so, it is possible to create a new game in which the 2R continuation mode with a small number of balls is endlessly extended and, as a result, a large number of balls can be obtained.

Further, in the above configuration, if the electric accessory 39a is supported in the special mode, for example, the common hold number CRN is easily accumulated, and as a result, the open/close execution mode can be expected.

(36) The types of jackpots described in the above embodiments and the like are examples, and other jackpot types may be provided. For example, even in the 2R continuation mode, an upper limit of the number of rounds may be set in the continuation variation mode so that it ends in one round if no V winning occurs in the first round. The open/close pattern selection rate may be different for each round. For example, a jackpot of a 5R continuous fluctuation mode in which the upper limit of the number of rounds in the continuous fluctuation mode is 5 is provided, and further, in each round, an open/close pattern A with a high round continuation rate is easily selected, and a 5R continuous fluctuation mode A and each round. Therefore, the 5R continuous variation mode B in which the opening/closing pattern B having a low round continuation rate is easily selected may be provided.

(37) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game state shifts to the accessory control state or the game times are started based on the hold information being consumed, so the game state shifts from the previous game state to a predetermined game state. It can be said that the game state is changed from the game state up to that time to the predetermined game state based on the fact that the hold information is consumed and the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is started as a result of the judgment of hit/absence. It can be said that the game state has been changed, and the game state has been changed from the game state up to that time to a predetermined game state based on the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

(38) In each of the above-described embodiments, the opening/closing accessory 168 may be configured to execute a predetermined operation based on the fact that the hold information is consumed, that is, at the start of the opening standby time or the start of the game. .. The predetermined operation is, for example, an operation in which a game ball does not enter the accessory device 150, but moves slightly from the closed state to the open state side, suggesting that the game ball may be in the open state. Conceivable.

(39) Each of the above inventions can be applied to the following configurations. That is, in the game board 24, a unit switching control (so-called round) in which an open state in which a game ball can enter is switched to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult or impossible to enter compared to the open state. A variable ball entrance device capable of executing a game is provided. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the lottery result based on the winning in one of the operation openings 38 and 39 is the jackpot result, and that it is notified by a predetermined notification unit). As a state advantageous to the player, the unit is switched to a special game state (so-called jackpot state) in which unit switching control of the variable ball entrance device is performed a plurality of times. Further, in the variable ball entrance device, a distribution for allocating which of the first passage part (for example, V zone) and the second passage part (normal zone) different from the first passage part the game ball entered into the device is distributed. Provide a device. In the special game state, it is possible to shift to the next unit switching control on condition that the first passing portion has passed during one unit switching control. Even in such a configuration, if the switching timing in the unit switching control is changed, the passage rate to the first passage portion side (that is, the unit switching control is continued without changing the distribution timing on the distribution device side). Rate) can be changed. By doing this, for example, while notifying the upper limit of the number of times unit switching control is performed in one special game state (round number), the continuation rate is changed, and the number of times unit switching control is actually performed. It is possible to realize a game in which attention is paid to (passage to the first passage portion). That is, not only for a simple game such as simply entering the variable ball-entering device, but also for the timing of entering the variable ball-entering device, the opening timing of the variable ball-entering device, and the flow-down mode of the game ball. It is possible to realize a game that draws attention, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game.

(40) In the configuration of (39) above, passing the game ball on the first passing portion side is the continuation condition in the unit switching control, but it may be changed as follows. For example, based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the lottery result based on the winning of any one of the operation openings 38 and 39 is a jackpot result, and that it is notified by a predetermined notification unit). , The variable ball entrance device is controlled to be switched to the open state, and by passing the game ball to the first passing portion in the open state, the variable ball entrance device or the variable ball entrance device is provided as an advantageous state for the player. Is configured to shift to a special game state (so-called big hit state) in which unit switching control of different variable ball entry devices is performed. Even in such a configuration, if the timing of opening (or closing) is changed, the passing rate to the first passing portion (special game The transition rate to the state) can be changed. That is, the occurrence rate of the special game state is changed by not only the winning probability of the lottery based on the entry into the operating ports 38 and 39 and the entry rate into the variable entry device but also the opening/closing pattern of the variable entry device. It is possible to diversify the game.

(41) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and sparrow balls.

Also, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Therefore, the present invention is also applied to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as payout of medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable includes a storage portion and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined so that the reels start to rotate.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-described embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses, etc.

The following characteristic group is known as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which includes a variable ball-entering device provided in the gaming area (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, for example, a gaming area The game state shifts to the specific control state when the game ball passes through the operation opening provided in the case.In this case, the variable ball entrance device is opened for a predetermined period, and the variable ball entrance device is opened. It becomes possible to enter a game ball, and as a specific event (predetermined event), for example, a game ball enters the variable ball entrance device and the game ball is a V winning hole or the like provided in the variable ball entrance device. Regarding the background art that "the variable ball entrance device or the other variable ball entrance device is continuously opened and closed in a predetermined manner based on the fact that the ball enters the mouth." Therefore, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game in the game machine. For example, in the pachinko machine, it is desired to devise a diversification of the manner of entering the V winning hole and the like." The invention has been made with a problem to be solved.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state Object device 150),
Variable reception control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable reception means based on occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry into the operating ports 38, 39 or start of a round game). (Function of executing opening/closing processing by main controller 81 and function of executing game control processing),
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (passage passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, a privilege granting unit (a function of executing the opening/closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or generation of an opening/closing execution mode) to a player. And the function to execute the winning process),
The first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is used). If there is a distribution state), and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310). If so, a non-sorting state), and a sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (the opening/closing pattern A, the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, The number of pieces of reservation information is a predetermined number or more, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, and the number of game times from the opening/closing execution mode is a predetermined number or less, Based on the fact that the condition that the V winning is likely to occur is satisfied, such as winning the change drawing by the changing drawing process and being able to win the V on the normal route even after the temporary change), at the first timing. First switching execution means for executing the state switching control (a function for executing the process for the opening/closing pattern A in the setting process for each round by the main controller 81, the setting process for each opening, the control start process, and the in-control process) , The function for executing the processing for the special opening A result and the special opening B result, the function for executing the processing for setting the opening/closing timing based on the second opening timing table, and the fact that the number of holding information is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Function for executing a process for setting the opening/closing timing, a function for executing a process for setting the opening/closing timing based on the operating state or the gaming state of the distribution members 300, 310, the first opening/closing timing changing process or the second opening/closing timing changing A function of executing opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 such that a V winning is likely to occur, such as a function of executing processing).
When the predetermined event occurs, a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening/closing patterns B and C, normal opening result, first opening timing table selected). , The number of holding information is less than a predetermined number, the grasping result of the operation status of the distribution members 300, 310 is not a predetermined result, and the number of game times from the opening/closing execution mode exceeds a predetermined number. Conditions that are unlikely to cause V winnings have been established, such as not winning the change drawing due to the changing drawing process, being unable to win Vs on the normal route after the temporary change, and being originally able to win Vs only on the normal route. Based on the above), second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, setting processing for each opening and closing) Function for executing processing for patterns B and C Function for executing normal opening result processing in control start processing and processing during control, function for executing processing for setting opening/closing timing based on the first opening timing table, hold A function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the number of pieces of information being less than a predetermined number, a function of executing a process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the operation status or the gaming state of the distribution members 300 and 310, A function of executing opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 such that a V winning is less likely to occur, such as a function of executing a process of directly adopting the temporarily set opening/closing timing),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to receive the game ball into the variable receiving means based on the occurrence of the predetermined event, and the variable receiving means is provided with the privilege when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The distribution means is provided, and switching of the mode in which it is easy/impossible to pass through the first passing portion side is performed at a predetermined timing. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, when the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control that influences the acceptance into the variable acceptance means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition different from the first condition is performed. When the two conditions are satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to change the ease/difficulty of passing to the first passage portion side (passing rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

In particular, even if the game ball is received in the variable receiving means, the event that the game ball does not pass the first passage portion side due to the sorting means (occurs frequently) occurs easily for the player. Not only can the privilege not be obtained, the interest in the game will be reduced, but also the player may feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, regarding the distribution timing on the distribution means side, the reception timing to the variable reception means is changed by changing the state switching timing without changing it, and then the first passing portion. The above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided by adopting a configuration in which the passing rate to the side is changed.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, the "predetermined timing" may be paraphrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific event". Good.

Feature A2. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, provided in the game area A ball entering means (role device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry into the operation ports 38, 39 or start of a round game), variable ball entry that executes state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means. Control means (a function of executing the opening and closing process by the main control device 81, a function of executing the game control process),
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (disconnection passage 191b) through which the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, a privilege granting unit (a function of executing the opening/closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or generation of an opening/closing execution mode) to a player. And the function to execute the winning process),
The first mode in which the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distributed state, and the second distribution member 310). If it is a distribution state) and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is a distribution state, the second distribution member). If it is 310, it is in a non-distributed state), and the distribution means (the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
Equipped with
The variable ball control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (the opening/closing pattern A, the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, The number of pieces of reservation information is a predetermined number or more, the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, and the number of game times from the opening/closing execution mode is a predetermined number or less, The first timing is based on the fact that the condition that the V winning is likely to occur, such as winning the change drawing by the changing drawing process or being able to win the V on the normal route even after the temporary change). In the first switching execution means for executing the state switching control (the setting process for each round by the main controller 81, the function for executing the process for the opening/closing pattern A in the setting process for each opening, and the main controller 81). The function to execute the processing for the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the control start processing and the processing during control, the function to execute the processing to set the opening/closing timing based on the second opening timing table, and the number of pending information. Is a predetermined number or more, the function of executing the process of setting the opening and closing timing, the function of executing the process of setting the opening and closing timing based on the operating status and gaming state of the distribution member 300, 310, A function of executing the opening/closing timing change processing or the second opening/closing timing change processing, such as a function of executing opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 so that a V winning is likely to occur.
When the predetermined event occurs, the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening/closing patterns B and C, normal opening result, and the first opening timing table is selected. That the number of holding information is less than a predetermined number, that the result of grasping the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is not a predetermined result, and the number of game times from the open/close execution mode is a predetermined number of times. V wins occur, such as exceeding the above, not winning the change lottery due to the change lottery process, being unable to win V on the normal route after the temporary change, and being originally able to win V only on the normal route. Second switching execution means (setting process for each round by the main control device 81, each opening process) for executing the state switching control at the second timing different from the first timing based on the fact that a difficult condition is satisfied). Based on the first opening timing table, the function of executing the processing for the opening/closing patterns B and C in the setting processing of the above, the function of executing the processing for the normal opening result in the control start processing and the processing during control by the main control device 81, The function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing, the function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the number of holding information is less than a predetermined number, the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310, and the game. The opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 is performed so that the V winning is less likely to occur, such as the function of executing the processing of setting the opening/closing timing based on the state and the function of executing the processing of directly adopting the temporarily set opening/closing timing. Function),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the bonus is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a allocating means, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing such that the mode easily/not easily passes through the first passage portion side. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, if the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that influences the entrance to the variable entrance means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition is When the different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to change the ease/difficulty of passing to the first passage portion side (passing rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

In particular, even if the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means, the event that the game ball does not pass the first passing portion side due to the sorting means occurs (many times), which is quite easy for the player. Not only can the privilege not be obtained, the interest in the game will be reduced, but also the player may feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, with respect to the distribution timing on the distribution means side, the timing of changing the state is changed without changing it, so that the timing of entering the variable ball entering means is changed, and the first timing after that is changed. With the configuration in which the passing rate to the passing portion side is changed, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience described above.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, the "predetermined timing" may be paraphrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific event". Good.

Features A3. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, provided in the game area A ball entering means (role device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable ball entrance control means (the opening/closing process by the main controller 81) for executing the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable ball entry means. Function to execute)
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (disconnection passage 191b) through which the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means can pass;
A privilege granting unit (a function of executing an opening/closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game) to a player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing unit,
The first mode in which the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distributed state, and the second distribution member 310). If it is a distribution state) and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is a distribution state, the second distribution member). If it is 310, it is in a non-distributed state), and the distribution means (the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
Based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied (it is determined in the processing of step S1204 by the main control device 81 that the mode is the continuation rate variation mode), the state switching control of the variable ball entering means is performed a plurality of times. A game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting to a specific state (opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed a number of times,
Equipped with
The specific state, in one of the state switching control, based on the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, the following state switching control is performed,
The variable ball control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, a first switching execution unit (mainly, a switching control unit) that executes the state switching control at the first timing in the specific state based on the satisfaction of the first condition (the opening/closing pattern A). A function of executing the process for the opening/closing pattern A in the setting process for each round by the control device 81 and the setting process for each opening),
When the predetermined event occurs, the second condition different from the first timing in the specific state is based on that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (opening/closing patterns B and C). Second switching execution means for executing the above-mentioned state switching control at a timing (a function of executing processing for opening/closing patterns B and C in setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, setting processing for each opening);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the bonus is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a allocating means, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing such that the mode easily/not easily passes through the first passage portion side. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, if the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that influences the entrance to the variable entrance means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition is When the different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to change the ease/difficulty of passing to the first passage portion side (passing rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

Further, the above configuration is a configuration in which the next state switching control is performed when the game ball passes through the first passing unit during one state switching control in the specific state, and in the specific state, the first passing unit is performed. The player has a strong interest in whether or not the game ball passes through.

In particular, even if the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means, the event that the game ball does not pass the first passing portion side due to the sorting means occurs (many times), which is quite easy for the player. Not only will the state switch control not be performed next, the interest in the game will be reduced, and the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, and the state switching timing is changed to change the timing of entering the variable entrance means, and then the first passage. With the configuration in which the passage rate to the unit side is changed, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience described above.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, the "predetermined timing" may be paraphrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific event". Good.

Features A4. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, provided in the game area A ball entering means (role device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (ball entry into the operating ports 38, 39), variable ball entry control means (main control) for executing state switching control of the variable ball entry means between the first state and the second state. A function of executing a game control process by the device 81),
A first passage portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passage portion (disconnection passage 191b) through which the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means can pass;
A privilege granting unit (a function of executing a winning process by the main controller 81) for granting a privilege (occurrence of an opening/closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing unit;
The first mode in which the game balls entered in the variable ball entering means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distributed state, and the second distribution member 310). If it is a distribution state) and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is a distribution state, the second distribution member). If it is 310, it is in a non-distributed state), and the distribution means (the distribution members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
It is possible to execute the state switching control of the variable ball entrance means a predetermined number of times based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied (it is determined that the result is not a deviation result or a direct hit result in the hit/miss determination process by the main control device 81). A game state transition means (main game controller 81 executes game control processing) capable of transitioning to a specific state (a state in which control processing is performed based on a normal opening result, a special opening A result, or a special opening B result) Function),
Equipped with
The variable ball control means,
When the predetermined event occurs, the first condition is satisfied (the result is the special opening A result or the special opening B result, the second opening timing table is selected, and the number of holding information is a predetermined number. That is, the grasping result of the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310 is a predetermined result, the number of game times from the opening/closing execution mode is a predetermined number or less, or a change by the change lottery process. Based on the fact that the condition that the V winning is likely to occur, such as winning the lottery or being able to win the V on the normal route even after the temporary change has been established), at the first timing in the specific state, Based on the second opening timing table, the first switching execution means for executing the state switching control (the function for executing the processing for the special opening A result and the special opening B result in the control start processing and the control processing by the main control device 81). The function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing, the function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the number of pieces of holding information being a predetermined number or more, the operation status of the distribution members 300 and 310, and the game. Opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 such as a function of executing opening/closing timing setting processing based on the state, a function of executing the first opening/closing timing changing processing or the second opening/closing timing changing processing so that V winning is likely to occur. Function to execute)
When the predetermined event occurs, the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (normal release result, selection of first release timing table, number of hold information is predetermined. It is less than the number, the grasping result of the operation status of the distribution members 300, 310 is not a predetermined result, the number of game times from the opening/closing execution mode exceeds a predetermined number, or a change is made by a change lottery process. Based on the fact that the condition that the V winning is less likely to occur, such as not winning the lottery, being unable to win the V on the ordinary route after the temporary change, and being originally able to win the V only on the ordinary route) , A second switching execution unit (main controller 81) that executes the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the start timing of the specific state different from the case of the first switching execution unit. The function to execute the process for the normal release result in the control start process and the process during control by the function to execute the process to set the opening/closing timing based on the first release timing table, The function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing based on a certain thing, the function of executing the process of setting the opening/closing timing based on the operation status and the gaming state of the distribution members 300 and 310, and the temporarily set opening/closing timing A function of executing opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 such that a V winning is less likely to occur, such as a function of executing processing adopted as it is).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means based on the occurrence of a predetermined event, and the bonus is given when the game ball passes through the first passing portion. The means is provided with a allocating means, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing such that the mode easily/not easily passes through the first passage portion side. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined event occurs, if the first condition is satisfied, state switching control that influences the entrance to the variable entrance means is performed at the first timing, and the first condition is When the different second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to change the ease/difficulty of passing to the first passage portion side (passing rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

In particular, even if the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means, the event that the game ball does not pass the first passing portion side due to the sorting means occurs (many times), which is quite easy for the player. Not only will the interest not be given to the game without the award being given, but the player may also feel unfair. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, and the state switching timing is changed to change the timing of entering the variable entrance means, and then the first passage. With the configuration in which the passage rate to the unit side is changed, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience described above.

Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific state in which the variable ball entering means can enter the ball is entered. And according to the said structure, the timing of state switching control can be changed, without changing the start timing of a specific state. As a result, not only is the rate of ball entry into the variable ball entry means diversified in the specific state, but if the timing of state switching control is set in relation to the switching timing of the mode of the distribution means, the It is possible to make the passing rate of the game ball to the first passing portion side different while making it difficult to aim the passing of the game ball to the first passing portion.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, the "predetermined timing" may be paraphrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific event". Good.

Features A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passing portion side more easily than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion, and therefore the privilege based on that passage is provided. Is easily given. Therefore, it is considered that the player has a great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the characteristic A3, the fact that the game ball passes through the first passing portion in the specific state is the condition for shifting to the next state switching control, so that the first condition is satisfied. When the second condition is satisfied, it is difficult to shift to the next state switching control. Therefore, not only which condition is satisfied in each state switching control, but also the continuation rate of the state switching control can be changed, and a novel game can be performed.

Further, when this configuration is applied to the configuration of the characteristic A4, since the passing rate to the first passing portion can be changed without changing the start timing of the specific state, the action such as aiming and the like can be suppressed, and The imparting rate (passing rate to the first passing portion) can be changed, and a novel game can be performed.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state Object device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means for executing the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (the opening/closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed. Function),
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (passage passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, a privilege granting unit (a function of executing the opening/closing process by the main control device 81) for granting a privilege (continuation of a round game or generation of an opening/closing execution mode) to a player. )When,
The first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is used). If there is a distribution state), and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310). If so, a non-sorting state), and a sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ) A special game state (opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed over (), a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81),
Equipped with
In the special game state, in the one specific control, it is possible to perform the following specific control based on the game ball passing through the first passing portion,
The variable acceptance control means,
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the condition that easily causes the V winning, such as the opening/closing pattern A, is satisfied). First switching execution means to be executed (timing at which V allocation by the main control device 81 is likely to be performed, such as setting process for each round by the main control device 81, processing for the opening/closing pattern A in the setting process for each opening, and the like. A function of executing processing for opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168).
Based on that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied during the specific control (for example, a condition that makes it difficult to generate a V winning, such as opening and closing patterns B and C, is satisfied). Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, setting processing for opening/closing patterns B and C in each opening setting processing) A function of executing processing for opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 such that processing is performed at a timing at which V allocation is difficult to be performed),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the game sphere received in the situation where the game sphere can be received in the variable receiving means passes the first passing portion, the privilege is given to the variable receiving means. Distributing means is provided, and switching is performed at a predetermined timing such that the passage through the first passage portion side is easy or difficult. Then, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific control in which the state switching control can be executed a plurality of times is transferred to a special game state in which the state control can be executed a plurality of times. In this special game state, it is possible to perform the next specific control based on the fact that the first passing portion has been passed in the one specific control, and therefore, only the number received by the variable receiving means is required. Instead, the player is interested in whether or not the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion.

In such a configuration, during one specific control, if the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the first timing, and if the second condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing. In the variable receiving means, the distribution mode on the distribution means side is a predetermined timing, and since the distribution mode does not change, the timing of the state switching control on the variable reception means side should be changed as described above. Thus, it is possible to change the ease/difficulty of passing to the first passage portion side (passing rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

As a result, the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state can be designed without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, the "predetermined timing" may be paraphrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific event". Good.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control by the first switching execution means is performed, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion, and therefore, based on the passing thereof. Easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player has a great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature B3. In the special game state, the switching timing of the sorting means is set as a predetermined timing from the start of the one specific control, the game according to the characteristic B1 or the characteristic B2. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the switching timing of the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means is fixed from the start of the one specific control, while the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied. The receiving timing of the variable receiving means is different depending on whether to do so, and therefore the passing rate to the first passing portion changes. Thereby, the continuation rate of the specific control can be changed without changing the operation pattern of the distribution unit.

Feature B4. In each of the specific control of the special game state, it is provided with means for setting which of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the time of transition to the special game state, which is characterized by B1 to B1. The gaming machine according to any one of B3.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied depends on the special game state. Since it is set at the time of transition, for example, at the start of the special game state (at the time of transition), notification about the continuation rate (notification of a special game state with a high continuation rate or a specific state with a low continuation rate Notification, etc.) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which condition is satisfied when shifting to the special game state, and it is possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, "at the time of shifting to the special game state" can be paraphrased as "based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition".

Feature B5. Features B1 to B4 characterized by including means for setting which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control in each of the specific controls in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state changes depending on whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, which condition is satisfied is determined in the special game state. Since it is set at the start of the specific control, it is possible to always pay attention to which condition is satisfied in each specific control (whether the continuation rate is high or low).

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein a plurality of the distributing means are provided on a flow-down path of one gaming ball.

According to the above configuration, the passing rate to the first passing portion thereafter changes depending on the combination of the first aspect and the second aspect in each distributing means. Since the execution timing of the state switching control is set to be different depending on which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, it is possible to set the passage rate of the first passage portion to various values. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest.

In addition, "is provided separately from the distribution means, by performing a periodic operation, the game ball received by the variable receiving means to one of the first passage portion side and the second passage portion side If a configuration is provided in which "periodic operation means (rotating body 201) that can be derived" is provided, each distribution means that switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing and the cyclic operation is performed. It is possible to make a distinction between the periodic operation means and the periodic operation means.

Feature B7. As each of the plurality of distribution means provided, first distribution means (first distribution member 300, rotating body 201) visible from the front of the gaming machine, and visibility from the front of the gaming machine to the first A gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that a second sorting means (second sorting member 310) lower than the sorting means is provided.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific control is continued when the game ball passes through the first passage portion in the special game state, if the distribution means for allocating the passage rate to the first passage portion can be visually recognized, the distribution is performed. This is preferable from the viewpoint that the game can be enjoyed by watching as the minutes are played, and the attention to the game can be increased. On the other hand, if the sorting unit is visible, there is a possibility that an act of aiming at the sorting of the sorting unit may be performed, which may make it difficult to detect an illegal act. Therefore, it is possible to solve the conflicting problems caused by the high and low visibility by providing a plurality of distribution means and providing a difference in their visibility.

Feature B8. It is more likely that the game ball will pass through the first passing portion when the second distributing means is in the first mode than when the first distributing means is in the first mode. A gaming machine described in Feature B7.

According to the above configuration, it is more likely to pass the first passing portion when the second sorting means on the side with low visibility is used, and thus it is possible to more appropriately suppress aiming. be able to. As mentioned above, even if it is a contradictory issue due to high visibility, if fraudulent acts are performed, it is disadvantageous not only to the game hall and the game machine manufacturer, but also to other players who play legitimate games. Could give you. Therefore, measures against fraud are considered to be a top priority.

Feature B9. When the game sphere received by the variable receiving means reaches the allocating means, even if the allocating means is in the second mode, the game sphere can be led out to the first passing portion after that. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, which has a configuration.

According to the above configuration, even if the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed by either the first switching executing means or the second switching executing means, it is possible to leave the possibility of passing through the first passing portion. By doing so, even if the continuation rate of the specific control is changed depending on the timing of the state switching control, the continuation rate is not determined by only that, and if the state switching control is performed in which the continuation rate becomes low, Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being extremely lowered.

Feature B10. In the special game state, when the game ball passes through the first passing portion during one of the specific controls, the configuration shifts to the next specific control even if the period during which the specific control is performed remains. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the above configuration, the number of game balls to be received by the variable receiving means in the one specific control differs depending on the timing of passing the first passing portion in the one specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player is highly interested in when the game ball passes through the first passing portion, and the attention to the game can be increased.

The "period in which the specific control is performed" can be restated in more detail as "the number of times of state switching control in the specific control".

Feature B11. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing,
In the one specific control, the first condition is set so as to be easily established at a timing later than the second condition, The gaming machine according to the feature B10.

According to the above configuration, in the period in which one specific control is performed, it becomes easier to control so that the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion side toward the rear side. By doing so, the number of game balls accepted by the variable acceptance means during one specific control increases, and the period of interest for whether or not the game balls pass through the first passage portion becomes longer. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature B12. Regardless of which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, one period during which the state switching control is performed during the specific control is set to be the same period. The gaming machine according to any one of to B11.

According to the above configuration, while changing the passing rate of the first passing unit, that is, the continuation rate of the specific control, the period required for each state switching control in the specific control is the same period, so the fairness of the game is ensured. To be done. This is because if the period required for each state switching control is also made different, not only the continuation rate of the specific control but also the number of game balls accepted by the variable acceptance means will be different.

Feature B13. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls of the special game state, a setting means for setting which of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control is provided,
The setting means can make it easier for the first condition to be satisfied than the second condition in the state switching control for the first predetermined number of times in each of the specific controls. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B12.

According to the above configuration, in the specific control of the first predetermined number of times, since the first condition is easily established, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion. That is, the continuation rate is high in the specific control for the first predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the specific control of the first predetermined number of times, it is possible to entertain the special game state with an elegant feeling as the specific control continues. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature B14. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing,
In each of the specific controls of the special game state, a setting means for setting which of the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at the start of the specific control is provided,
The setting means can make it easier for the second condition to be satisfied than the first condition in the second specific number of times of the specific control in each of the specific controls. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B13.

According to the above configuration, in the specific control of the second predetermined number of times, the second condition is likely to be satisfied, so that the game ball does not easily pass through the first passing portion. That is, the continuation rate of the specific control for the second predetermined number of times is low. Therefore, in the second specific number of times of the specific control, whether or not the specific control is continued, that is, whether or not the game ball passes through the first passing portion, the attention is given to the whereabouts of the game ball, and the special game is performed. You can add intonation to the degree of attention during a state. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Note that the “second predetermined number of times” may be expressed as “a second predetermined number of times that is different from the first predetermined number of times” in relation to the feature B13.

Feature B15. In the characteristic B14, the setting unit can make it easier for the first condition to be satisfied than the second condition in the specific control subsequent to the second predetermined number of times. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation rate is low for the second predetermined number of times, the continuation rate is set to be high in the next specific control. Whether or not is an important factor, and the degree of attention to the second specific number of times of the specific control can be increased.

Feature B16. In the special game state transferred by the game state transition means, a first special game state (16R continuation mode) in which the first condition is more easily established than the second condition, and a second state in which the first condition is established. The second special game state (continuous variation mode) in which the condition is easily established, and the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B15.

According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the specific control in the special game state varies depending on which of the first special game state and the second special game state the special game state is. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the type of special game state, and the degree of attention to the game is improved.

Feature B17. The game state transition means is a configuration capable of transitioning to the special game state based on that the game ball accepted by the variable acceptance means has passed through the first passing portion,
Predetermined informing means (symbol display device) which one of the first special game state and the second special game state is to be transitioned after passing through the first passage portion and at least transitioning to the special game state 51) is provided with a notification control unit capable of giving notification (a function of executing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode by the effect control device 82 based on a control end command from the main control device 81),
The gaming machine according to Feature B16, wherein the predetermined notifying unit is provided near the variable receiving unit.

According to the above configuration, before the special game state transition, the player pays attention to whether or not the variable receiving means accepts the game ball and whether or not the accepted game ball passes through the first passing portion. After that, pay attention to which special game state is to be entered. Since the predetermined notification means is provided in the vicinity of the variable reception means, even if the player's attention target is different, each notification is given within a range that can be naturally seen. It is possible to prevent the players' interests from being dispersed.

Incidentally, "the predetermined notifying means is in the vicinity of the variable receiving means" means, for example,
"The variable receiving means and the predetermined notifying means are provided in a production unit having each of them, and the production unit is installed in a game area in which a game ball flows down."
“The variable receiving means and the predetermined notifying means are provided with a fixing unit for fixing to the game board, and in the fixing unit, the predetermined notifying means is fixed to an enclosing portion covering the variable receiving means. It can also be expressed as a "ru" configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state ( Accessory device 150),
A variable acceptance control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for performing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means,
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (passage passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, a game state transition process (main game state transition process) capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (open/close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function of executing the game state transition processing by the control device 81),
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is used). If there is a distribution state), and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310). If so, a non-sorting state), and a sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
The state switching of the variable receiving means is performed based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied (a ball has entered the operation ports 38, 39, an opening waiting time has ended, a variable display time has ended, etc.). Game state transition means (a function of executing game control processing by the main control device 81) capable of shifting control to a specific state in which control can be executed a predetermined number of times (state in which processing during control is performed based on the result of normal opening, etc.) )When,
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied based on that the first condition is satisfied (for example, a condition that easily causes a V winning, such as a special opening result, is satisfied), at the first timing. First switching execution means for executing switching control (a function for executing opening/closing control processing of the opening/closing accessory 168 at a timing at which V distribution is easily generated);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (the condition that the V winning is less likely to occur, such as the result of normal opening is satisfied), and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing without making the timing for satisfying the condition different from the case of the first switching execution means (it is difficult to generate V allocation). A function for executing the opening/closing control processing of the opening/closing accessory 168 at a timing),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball is received by the variable receiving means and the game ball passes through the first passing portion, the variable receiving means is provided with the allocating means in the configuration in which the variable receiving means shifts to the special game state. Therefore, at a predetermined timing, the mode is switched such that the passage through the first passage portion side is easy/difficult. In such a gaming machine, the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. In that case, when the first condition is satisfied, the variable receiving means receives the variable receiving means at the first timing. When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed at the second timing different from the first timing. By doing so, it is possible to change the ease/difficulty of passing to the first passage portion side (passing rate) without changing the distribution mode on the distribution means side.

In particular, even if the game ball is received by the variable receiving means, if the game ball does not pass the first passing portion side due to the sorting means (many times), it is quite special for the player. Not only will the interest in the game be reduced without shifting to the gaming state, but it may also give the player an unfair feeling. Therefore, as described above, the distribution timing on the distribution means side is not changed, but the state switching timing is changed to change the reception timing to the variable reception means, and then the first passage portion side. The above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided by adopting a configuration in which the passage rate to the is changed.

In addition, as the timing of switching between the first mode and the second mode in the distribution means, the "predetermined timing" may be paraphrased as "the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific event". Good.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passing portion side more easily than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball is more likely to pass through the first passing portion, and therefore the privilege based on that passage is provided. Is easily given. Therefore, it is considered that the player has a great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

In particular, in the characteristic C1, since the passing rate to the first passing portion can be changed without changing the timing at which the predetermined condition is met, the rate of transition to the special game state (the It is possible to change the passing rate to one passage portion), and to have a novel game.

Feature C3. In the allocating means, the switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied, C1 Alternatively, the gaming machine described in the feature C2.

According to the above configuration, the distribution unit switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, it is easier to give the player a sense of fairness in the game, as compared with a configuration in which the distribution means switches at random timing. On the other hand, as described in the characteristic C1, the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means have different timings of the state switching control during the specific state. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to make the passing rate to the first passing portion different by performing the state switching control by each switching executing means.

Feature C4. The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means perform the state switching control at the first timing and the second timing without changing the number of times the state switching control is performed in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which has a configuration capable of different timing.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the passing rate to the first passing portion without changing the number of times the state switching control is performed in one specific state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player feels unfair due to the number of state switching controls increasing or decreasing.

Feature C5. The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means do not change the length of the period during which the variable reception means is in the first state in one of the specific states, and the first timing and the second timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, which is configured so that the execution timing of the state switching control can be different depending on the timing.

According to the above configuration, since the variable receiving means is in the first state and the length of the period during which the game balls can be received is the same, no matter which switching execution means performs the state switching control, the variable receiving means is sent to the variable receiving means. The acceptance rate (ball entry rate) itself does not change. Therefore, the fairness of the game can be further ensured.

It should be noted that a configuration is provided including "a means (payout device 96) for giving a privilege (a prize ball based on a prize to the accessory device 150) to the player based on the fact that the game ball has been accepted by the variable acceptance means". Then, it is possible to further enhance fairness due to the fact that the acceptance rate of the variable acceptance means does not change. By the way, in view of the playability of how to pass the game ball to the first passing portion, the privilege given based on the fact that the game ball is received by the variable receiving means is that the game is performed on the first passing portion. It is preferable that the privilege is different from the privilege (transition to the special game state) given based on the passing of the ball.

Feature C6. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing,
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the state switching control on the rear side is easier to perform the state switching control by the first switching execution means than the state switching control on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, the rear side state switching control has a higher passage rate to the first passing portion than the front side state switching control. As a result, the specific state can be enjoyed to the end, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased appropriately.

Feature C7. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing,
In the one state switching control in the specific state, the state switching control between the long-term mode and the short-term mode is performed so that the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is relatively long or short. Is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the first switching execution means is configured to easily select the state switching control in the long-term mode.

According to the above configuration, the pass rate to the first passing portion is increased in the state switching control in the long-term mode, so that the pass rate to the variable receiving means and the pass rate to the first passing portion are linked. Therefore, the points to be noticed by the player are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature C8. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined firing cycle (0.6 sec),
The first switching execution means and the second switching execution means do not change the length of the period during which the variable reception means is in the first state in one of the specific states, and the first timing and the second timing. The configuration is such that the execution timing of the state switching control can be different depending on the timing.
When the state switching control is performed a plurality of times in the specific state, in the state switching control in the short period mode, the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is shorter than the firing cycle. The gaming machine according to feature C7, which is set.

According to the above configuration, although the game ball cannot be expected to be received by the state switching control which is the short-term mode, the reception of the game ball can be expected to the maximum by the state switching control which is the long-term mode. Therefore, the timing at which the player should pay attention becomes clearer, and the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature C9. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing,
In the case where the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means and the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution means, the specific state ends earlier by the first switching execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8, which can be set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means that increases the passage rate to the first passage portion, the specific state ends earlier, so that, for example, the next specific state is reserved. In this case, it is possible to make an early transition to the next specific state, and if passage to the first passing portion occurs, it is possible to make an early transition to the special game state after the end of the particular state. Therefore, the smooth progress of the game can be realized, and even if the passage to the first passage portion does not occur, the feeling can be switched early without giving the player time to be discouraged. Can be urged.

Feature C10. In the distribution unit, a switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
Any one of the characteristics C1 to C9 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable receiving means switches from the second state to the first state as the state switching control. Gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, switching of the sorting means is performed at a predetermined timing after the switching of the variable receiving means from the second state to the first state is started. By doing so, the operation start timing of the variable acceptance means and the operation start timing of the distribution means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further secured.

Feature C11. In the distribution unit, a switching timing between the first mode and the second mode is set as a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The game area is provided with a ball entry portion (actuation ports 38, 39) into which a game ball can enter.
The predetermined condition is satisfied on the basis of occurrence of a ball entering the ball entering section or on the basis that the ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entering section is a predetermined determination target. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9.

According to the above configuration, the specific state is started based on the entry of the game ball into the entry portion, or the specific state is started based on the entry information based on the entry being the predetermined determination target. To be done. Then, the distribution means is switched at a predetermined timing from the start of this specific state. By doing so, the timing at which the entry into the entry portion or the entry information is determined and the operation start timing of the distribution means become constant, and the fairness of the game is further secured.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state Object device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means for executing the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (the opening/closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed. Function),
A specific passing portion (V winning passage 191a) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass,
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ) A special game state (opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed over (), a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81),
Equipped with
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, it is possible to perform the next specific control based on the continuation condition being satisfied when the game ball has passed through the specific passage section. The configuration is
In the specific control, high continuation specific control in which ease of establishment of the continuation condition is relatively high, and low continuation specific control, are set,
As a period in which each state switching control of the specific control is performed, a first predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at the first timing is different from the first timing, assuming that the control timing of the state switching control is different. And a second predetermined period in which the state switching control is performed at two timings,
Based on that the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period in the predetermined specific control in the special game state, the next specific control is set as the high continuation specific control, and is set in the second predetermined period. Based on that the continuation condition is satisfied, a setting means (function of executing the process of step S1408 by the main control device 81) capable of setting the next specific control as the low continuation specific control is provided. Characteristic game machine.

According to the above configuration, the continuation rate of the next specific control differs depending on whether the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period or the continuation condition is satisfied in the second predetermined period. As a result, it is considered that the player has a great interest in the timing of establishment of the continuation condition in the predetermined specific control. Then, such an effect can be realized only by changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means, and the attention to the game can be suitably increased with a simple configuration.

Feature D2. In the predetermined specific control, the game machine according to feature D1, wherein the first predetermined period is set to the rear side rather than the second predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period on the rear side in the specific control, the next specific control becomes the high continuation specific control, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, each specific control during the special game state can be enjoyed for a longer time, which is preferable for the player. Further, for example, in the specific control, it is possible to perform a game such as adjusting the acceptance timing of the game balls to the variable acceptance means so that the continuation condition is satisfied during the first predetermined period, not during the second predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game for adjusting the timing of satisfaction of the continuation condition during the specific control.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the specific passage portion more easily than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, the state switching control is performed at a timing during which the specific passage portion is more likely to pass during the first predetermined period on the rear side, so that the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied during the first predetermined period on the rear side. .. Therefore, for example, during the second predetermined period in which the continuation condition is difficult to be established, the novel game is realized in which the passage to the specific passage portion is not desired and the subsequent first predetermined period is waited for to pass to the specific passage portion. be able to.

Feature D4. Regardless of whether the first predetermined period or the second predetermined period, the length of the period of being in the first state is set so that the game ball can be received in the variable receiving means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, in the specific control, the game ball is received by the variable receiving means in the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, so that it is possible to cause the game ball to continue to be launched. With this, it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting that stops the firing of the game ball.

Feature D5. One of the features D1 to D3, wherein the length of the period during which the variable receiving means is in the first state is set to be longer in the second predetermined period than in the first predetermined period. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied, it is significant to continue firing the game ball even during the second predetermined period in which the next specific control may be the low continuous specific control. For example, the number of times of specific control is limited in the special game state, and in the upper limit number of times of specific control, the next continuation rate is irrelevant. Therefore, with the above-described configuration, it is possible to make the game desired with the intention of allowing the variable receiving means to receive the game ball even during the second predetermined period.

Feature D6. The special game state is the special game state if the continuation condition is not satisfied when the number of times of the state switching control reaches a predetermined number of times (RC2=19) in the one specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5, wherein the game machine ends.

According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player tries to establish the continuation condition before the number of state switching controls reaches the predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set in the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control as in the case of the feature D2, it is considered that the continuation condition is satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. .. Therefore, it is possible to entertain a feeling of balance such that the special game state end condition (a predetermined number of times is reached without the continuation condition being satisfied) and the continuation condition is tried to be satisfied during the first predetermined period. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Feature D7. The special game state is the special game state when the continuation condition is not satisfied when the number of receptions to the variable reception means reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine) in the one specific control. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the gaming state is to end.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, it is considered that the player tries to establish the continuation condition before the number of pieces received by the variable receiving means reaches the predetermined number. However, if the first predetermined period set in the high continuation specific control is set on the rear side of the specific control as in the case of the feature D2, it is considered that the continuation condition is satisfied on the rear side as much as possible. .. Therefore, it is possible to entertain such a feeling of balance such that the special game state end condition (a predetermined number is reached without the continuation condition being satisfied) and the continuation condition is satisfied during the first predetermined period. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Feature D8. Any of the features D1 to D7 characterized in that, when the specific control this time is set to the high continuation specific control, the next specific control is also easily set to the high continuation specific control. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period by the predetermined specific control during the special game state, the high continuation specific control is likely to be set from the next time onward. Therefore, the degree of attention in the predetermined specific control is further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the predetermined specific control is the low continuation specific control.

According to the above configuration, even in the low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the first predetermined period, the next specific control is set to the high continuation specific control. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention even during the low continuation specific control in which the continuation condition is difficult to be satisfied.

Feature D10. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the specific control next to the specific control can also be set to the specific control.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined specific control having different continuation conditions depending on the establishment timing can be continued, so that high interest is given to each of the specific controls during the special game state (not to miss the establishment timing of the continuation condition). Can be set).

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state ( Accessory device 150),
A variable acceptance control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for performing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means,
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (passage passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion, a privilege giving means (for example, a game by the main control device 81) that gives a player a privilege (transition to the opening/closing execution mode, establishment of a round continuation condition). Function to execute state transition processing),
A first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is used). If there is a distribution state), and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310). If so, a non-sorting state), and a sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
Equipped with
In the control mode of the state switching control of the variable acceptance control means,
The game ball received by the variable receiving means includes the first timing (timing at which V distribution can be performed) that easily reaches the distribution means in the situation where the distribution means is in the one aspect. A first state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is set to the first state (opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 that makes it easy to perform V allocation);
The game ball received by the variable receiving means includes the second timing (timing at which V distribution is difficult to be performed) in which it is difficult to reach the distribution means in the situation where the distribution means is in the one aspect. A second state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is set to the first state (opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 that makes it difficult to perform V distribution);
Is set,
When performing the state switching control, the variable acceptance control unit switches between the first state switching control mode and the second state switching control mode (for example, by the main control device 81). The control timing of the opening/closing accessory 168, such as the round setting process, the setting process for each opening/closing, and the process during control, is controlled so as to have an opening/closing mode with a timing at which V allocation is easily performed and an opening/closing mode with a timing other than that. A gaming machine characterized by having a function to do).

According to the above configuration, the game balls received by the variable receiving means are distributed to the first passing portion side as a result of being distributed by the distribution means whose distribution destination is changed at a predetermined timing. Will be given a privilege. In such a configuration, the variable reception control means for performing the state switching control of the variable reception means is capable of executing the variable reception control including the first timing at which the variable passage means easily passes the first passage portion side, Since the switching means that can execute switching between the second variable acceptance control mode that includes the second timing that does not easily pass the first passage portion side is included, the distribution means side that operates at a predetermined timing is provided. It is possible to change the ease/difficulty of passing to the first passing portion (passing rate) without changing the distribution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature E2. Characteristically, the first timing is set so as to include a timing at which the game ball is received by the variable receiving means at the first timing and which does not easily pass through the first passing portion. The gaming machine described in E1.

According to the above configuration, even if the variable receiving means receives the variable receiving means at the first timing by the distributing means, it is not necessarily distributed to the first passing portion side. Do not let the interest in the destination of the accepted game ball diminish. Therefore, interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

Feature E3. The game machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the second timing is set such that the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass through the first passing portion.

According to the above configuration, even if it is accepted by the variable accepting means at the second timing by the allocating means, the possibility of passing through the first passing portion remains, the player is not discouraged, and the interest in the game is extremely high. Can be suppressed.

Feature E4. The first state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the one state switching control of the plurality of times of the state switching control is performed by the distribution means in the one mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, which is set as the state switching control at a first timing at which the distribution means is easily reached in a certain situation.

According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control is not the state switching control but another state switching control even when there is a situation in which it must be executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing that makes it easy to reach the first passage portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

Feature E5. In the plurality of times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control of the first timing is performed before the state switching control of the first timing. The gaming machine according to feature E4, wherein one state switching control mode is set.

According to the above configuration, the state switching control on the side that is not the state switching control that is the first timing is performed first, so at that timing, the player determines whether or not it is the first state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, the interest in each state switching control mode can be increased and the game can be absorbed.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the distribution unit is configured to be switchable at a predetermined timing from a timing when the different state switching control is performed.

According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution means can be defined regardless of the first timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the first timing, for example, one state switching control conforms to the regulation of the gaming machine, By changing the state switching control (state switching control of the first timing) other than the above, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E7. The second state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of times of the state switching control is performed by the distribution means in the first mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, which is set as the state switching control at a second timing at which it is difficult to reach the sorting means under certain circumstances.

According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control is not the state switching control but another state switching control even when there is a situation in which it must be executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the second timing when it is difficult to reach the first passage portion side, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be exhibited in consideration of the above situation.

If the configuration is applied to the gaming machine having the feature E4, both state switching control modes become multiple state switching controls, and it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode. ..

Feature E8. Among the plurality of times of the status switching control, the status switching control different from the status switching control of the second timing is performed before the status switching control of the second timing. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein a two-state switching control mode is set.

According to the above configuration, the state switching control on the side other than the state switching control that is the second timing is performed first, so at that timing, the player determines whether or not it is in the second state switching control mode. I can't. By doing so, the interest in each state switching control mode can be increased and the game can be absorbed.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to feature E8, wherein the distribution unit is configured to be switchable from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed at the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, the distribution timing of the distribution unit can be defined independently of the second timing. That is, since the distribution timing of the distribution means can be set in accordance with the state switching control on the side different from the second timing, for example, the one state switching control conforms to the regulation of the gaming machine, By changing the state switching control (state switching control of the second timing) other than the above, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 can be obtained.

Feature E10. The first state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of times of the state switching control is performed by the distribution means in the one mode. It is set as the state switching control which is the first timing at which the distribution means can be easily reached in a certain situation.
The second state switching control mode is configured by a plurality of times of the state switching control, and the state switching control of one of the plurality of times of the state switching control is performed by the distribution means in the first mode. Is set as the state switching control which is the second timing at which it is difficult to reach the sorting means in such a situation.
The state switching control different from the state switching control at the first timing and the state switching control different from the state switching control at the second timing are set to be executed at the same timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, which is characterized in that

According to the above configuration, for example, at least one state switching control is not the state switching control but another state switching control even when there is a situation in which it must be executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, if the state switching control is performed at the first timing at which the first passage portion side is easily reached or at the second timing at which the first passage portion side is difficult to reach, based on the above situation, the excellent effect described in the feature E1 is exhibited. can do. Then, if the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing is executed at the same timing, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode.

Feature E11. In the plurality of times of the state switching control, the state switching control different from the state switching control of the first timing is performed before the state switching control of the first timing. 1 state switching control mode is set,
Among the plurality of times of the status switching control, the status switching control different from the status switching control at the second timing is performed before the status switching control at the second timing. 2 state switching control mode is set,
The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the distribution unit is configured to be switchable from the timing at which the different state switching control is performed at the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, the switching timing of the distribution unit can be set in accordance with the timing at which the state switching control on the side different from the first timing and the second timing is performed. As in the above feature E10, it is difficult for the player to understand which switching control mode, and the state switching control on the different side precedes the state switching control at the first timing or the second timing. Because it is done in the same way, the effect of making it difficult to understand is enhanced. Therefore, for example, it is possible to suppress an act of aiming at the first state switching control mode.

Feature E12. The variable acceptance control means performs a plurality of specific controls (round games) in which the state switching control of the variable acceptance means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A game state transition means (main controller 81 executes a game state transition process) capable of shifting to a special game state (open/close execution mode of continuous rate variation mode) that can be executed over 16 times (for example, 16 times, RC1) Function)
In the special game state, in the one specific control, based on the game ball has passed the first passing portion, the following specific control can be performed. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E11.

According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied to the control mode of the variable acceptance control during the special game state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be achieved.

Feature E13. The privilege granting means has a configuration capable of shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, as the privilege,
The variable acceptance control means is based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established (a ball has entered the operation ports 38, 39, an opening waiting time has ended, a variable display time has ended, etc.). The game state transition means (by the main control device 81) capable of transitioning the state switching control of the variable acceptance means to a specific state in which it can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which control processing is performed based on the result of normal opening) The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, which is provided with a function of executing a game control process.

According to the above configuration, the present invention can be applied to the control mode of the variable acceptance control particularly during the normal gaming state, and the excellent effect of the feature E1 can be achieved.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion (first operating port 38, second operating port 39) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering portion (function for executing a winning process for the working opening by the main controller 81),
An information storage unit (reserved ball storage area 114b) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a specific number, which is a plurality of predetermined numbers, as an upper limit;
Transition determination means for sequentially performing transition determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (function of executing win/loss determination processing by the main control device 81) )When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
In the game area,
A specific passage portion (V winning opening 182a) through which a game ball can pass,
Provided on the upstream side of the specific passage portion, a first mode (open state or distribution state) in which it is easy to guide the game ball to the specific passage portion, and guides the game ball to the specific passage portion more than in the first mode. Distribution means (opening/closing accessory 168, first distribution members 300, 310) capable of switching to a difficult second mode (closed state or non-distributed state),
Is provided,
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific passage portion, a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of shifting the game state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. )When,
A variable distribution control unit (a function for executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for executing the mode switching control between the first mode and the second mode of the distribution unit,
Equipped with
The variable distribution control means,
When the shift determination unit makes the shift determination, the mode switching control is executed at a first timing based on that the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit is a first predetermined number. First switching execution means (for example, a function to execute the game control process by the main control device 81 when the common hold number CRN is 0),
When the shift determination unit makes the shift determination, the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit is a second predetermined number different from the first predetermined number. Second switching execution means for executing the mode switching control at a second timing different from one timing (for example, a function for executing a game control process by the main controller 81 when the common hold number CRN is 3),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the special information is acquired based on the ball entering the ball entering portion, the special information is stored in the information storage means up to the specific number, and the stored special information is sequentially determined for the transition determination. In the target gaming machine, a specific passage portion is provided in the game area, and distribution means is provided upstream of the specific passage portion, and the distribution mode switching control is performed at the time of transition determination. It is performed at different timing depending on the number of stored special information. This makes it possible to correlate the number of stored special information with the passage rate to the specific passage unit. For example, if the number of stored special information is large, the mode switching control is performed at a timing when the special information passage is easy. , If the number of stored special information is small, the mode switching control is performed at a timing at which it easily passes to the specific passage portion, or the novel game of changing the transition rate to the advantageous state in relation to the stored number. can do.

Here, for example, as a configuration for changing the transition rate to the advantageous state in relation to the number of memories, assuming that it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is transitioned through lottery based on numerical information, the probability of the lottery It is also possible to make the number different depending on the number of memories. However, with such a configuration, the transition to the advantageous state is decided only by exchanging numerical information, and not only deviating from the original pleasure of the gaming machine of enjoying the flowing mode of the game ball, but only the numerical information There is also an increased possibility that a fraudulent act will be carried out by taking advantage of the playability that progresses in the exchange. Therefore, as in the above-described configuration, in the configuration in which the game ball shifts to the advantageous state by passing through the specific passage portion, the mode switching control of the sorting means on the upstream side of the specific passage portion is set as the number of stored special information. By associating with each other, it is possible to make it more difficult to perform fraudulent activities while enjoying the flow-down mode of the game ball. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature F2. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the specific passage portion more easily than the second timing,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the first predetermined number is set to be larger than the second predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, as the number of pieces of special information stored in the information storage means increases, the mode switching control is executed at a timing at which the specific passage portion can be easily passed. As a result, a new game of expecting that a large amount of special information is stored in the information storage means can be created, and interest can be improved.

Feature F3. In the gaming state, a predetermined state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the transition determination by the transition determination unit is not performed even if the special information is stored in the information storage unit is set. Gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the feature F2, the transition determination is not performed in the predetermined state, so that the special information is easily accumulated. Thereby, it is possible to create a game such as how to store the special information in the predetermined state.

It should be noted that the predetermined state can also be expressed as a state in which "the special information is acquired by the information acquisition unit, but the migration determination unit does not perform the migration determination".

Feature F4. The predetermined state is the advantageous state, the gaming machine according to the feature F3.

According to the above configuration, when the game ball passes through the specific passage portion and shifts to the advantageous state, the shift determination regarding the special information is not performed, and as a result, the special information is easily accumulated during the advantageous state. For example, when the end condition of the advantageous state is satisfied and the condition is ended, and the transition determination is made for the accumulated special information, the mode switching control is performed at the timing when the game ball easily passes through the specific passage portion as described above. .. As a result, the advantageous state is extended. Thus, instead of realizing the change in the transition probability to the advantageous state or the extended state of the advantageous state by lottery etc. using numerical information, the player visually understands the game state and the mode switching control of the distribution means. By realizing as much as possible, it becomes possible to create a new game in which the fairness of the game is secured.

Feature F5. As the distribution means,
A first distribution means (opening/closing accessory 168) in which the mode switching control is executed by the first switching execution means or the second switching execution means according to the number of the special information stored in the information storage means; ,
Regardless of the number of the special information stored in the information storage unit, the second distribution unit (rotating body 201, first distribution member 300, 2 distribution member 310),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

According to the above configuration, the first allocating means and the second allocating means that have different timings of mode switching control depending on the number of stored special information and the second allocating means that do not differ from each other are provided. Since the first distribution means is provided, it is easy to give the player a sense of fairness in the game.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the first distribution unit is arranged on an upstream side in a flow-down path to the specific passage unit with respect to the second distribution unit.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the mode switching control of the first distribution unit on the upstream side of the second distribution unit is performed is made different according to the number of the special information, so that the predetermined timing can be obtained. With respect to the second distribution means in which the mode switching control is performed, it is possible to change the distribution ratio to the specific passage portion by setting the first distribution means. Therefore, the effect of the feature F5 can be more suitably achieved.

Feature F7. In the game area, a predetermined receiving device (role device 150) capable of receiving a game ball is provided,
The specific passage portion is arranged at a position where the game ball received by the predetermined receiving device can pass,
The first sorting means is provided at a position where it is difficult to sort the game balls received in the predetermined receiving device, while the second sorting means is received in the predetermined receiving device. The game machine according to feature F5 or feature F6, wherein the game ball is provided at a position where the game balls can be distributed.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the game ball received in the receiving device is distributed to the specific passage portion side by the second distribution means. For example, when the game balls received in the receiving device are distributed to the side different from the specific passage portion by the first distribution means, as a player, some operation is performed in the game hall or the game machine side. Then, you may feel distrust. On the other hand, with the above-mentioned configuration, the game balls received in the receiving device are not distributed by the first distribution means but are distributed by the second distribution means that operates at a fixed timing. It is easy to feel a sense of fairness.

Feature F8. The first allocating means becomes a mode in which the game ball can be received in the predetermined receiving device by being in the first mode, and the game ball in the predetermined receiving device by being in the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature F7, which is difficult to accept.

According to the above configuration, the first allocating means and the second allocating means can be preferably arranged in relation to a predetermined receiving device. Further, even if the game balls are received by a predetermined receiving device, not all of them pass through the specific passage portion because the second distribution means distributes the game balls. Therefore, it is difficult to directly understand that the passage rate of the specific passage unit changes even if the timing of the mode switching control by the first allocating means is changed to change the acceptance rate to a predetermined receiving device. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unfair in the configuration in which the passing rate of the specific passing portion is changed.

Feature F9. The first switching execution means controls the first distribution means so that a period in which the state of the first mode is maintained is a first period,
The second switching execution means controls the first allocating means so that the period during which the state of the first mode is maintained is the first period, in the characteristic F8. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether the mode switching control is performed by the first switching execution unit or the mode switching control is performed by the second switching execution unit, the acceptance rate of the predetermined receiving device. Does not change. Therefore, it is difficult to give an unfair feeling to the game.

In addition, if the configuration is provided with "a privilege granting unit (payout device 96) capable of granting a privilege (prize ball) to a player based on the fact that the game ball is accepted into a predetermined accepting device", The effect of not changing the rate can be more specifically exhibited.

Feature F10. The first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the specific passage portion more easily than the second timing,
The first predetermined number is set as a number larger than the second predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the first timing is set to be closer to a timing at which the shift determination is performed than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, as the number of special information stored in the information storage means increases, the specific passage portion is more likely to pass through. In the configuration, as the number of special information increases, the mode switching control is executed earlier. Therefore, it is possible to realize a smooth and quick game while realizing a game in which the number of special information is increased and the specific passage portion is easily passed.

Feature F11. The variable allocation control means can execute the mode switching control based on the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means that the special information corresponds to the shift information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F10, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the special information acquired based on the entry into the entry portion is the target of the transition determination, and the determination result of the transition determination corresponds to the transition information. Based on this, the mode switching control of the distribution means by the variable distribution control means is executed. Then, it is determined whether this mode switching control facilitates passage through the specific passage portion. By applying a characteristic configuration of changing the mode switching control according to the number of stored special information of the above-mentioned feature F1 to such a gaming machine, in the game starting from entering the ball entering portion, It is possible to create a novel gameplay while placing importance on the original fun of the gaming machine, such as entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance part, since the ball entry rate itself is given the highest priority. .. Therefore, interest can be improved.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state Object device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means for executing the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (the opening/closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed. Function),
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (passage passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
First privilege granting means (opening/closing process by the main control device 81) for granting the player a first privilege (continuation of round game or generation of opening/closing execution mode) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion. Function to execute)
The first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the first passing portion side (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in a non-distribution state, and the second distribution member 310 is used). If there is a distribution state), and a second mode in which it is more difficult to distribute to the first passage portion side than the first mode (for example, the first distribution member 300 is in the distribution state, the second distribution member 310). If so, a non-sorting state), and a sorting means (sorting members 300, 310 and the rotating body 201) capable of switching at a predetermined timing.
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, as the first benefit, the specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) can be executed. A game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) capable of shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode),
In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, a grasping unit that grasps that the game ball has passed through the first passing unit (a function of the main controller 81 to execute the processes of steps S1329 and S1330),
Equipped with
The variable acceptance control means,
During the specific control, the state switching control is performed at the first timing based on that the first condition is satisfied (for example, the condition that the V winning is easily generated, such as the opening/closing pattern A is satisfied). First switching execution means to be executed (timing at which V allocation by the main control device 81 is easy to be performed, such as the setting process for each round by the main control device 81, the process for the opening/closing pattern A in the setting process for each opening, and the like. Function for executing processing for opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168).
Based on that a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied during the specific control (for example, a condition that makes it difficult to generate a V winning, such as opening and closing patterns B and C, is satisfied). Second switching execution means for executing the state switching control at a second timing different from the first timing (setting processing for each round by the main controller 81, setting processing for opening/closing patterns B and C in each opening setting processing) A function of executing processing for opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 such that processing is performed at a timing at which V allocation is difficult to be performed),
Equipped with
A second privilege granting unit (main controller 81 in step S1408) capable of granting the second privilege (each sorting table in FIG. 35, display mode in FIG. 41B) according to the result of the gripping unit. Gaming machine, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of step SB105 by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, in the normal game state, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, the special game state is transferred as the first benefit. In this special game state, the state change control of the variable receiving means is different in control timing between the case of the first switching execution means and the case of the second switching execution means, and as a result, the passage to the first passing portion is performed. The rate will change. In this case, since the mode of the distribution means is switched at a predetermined timing, even if the passing rate to the first passing portion is different as described above, a feeling of distrust or unfairness given to the player is given. Can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the special game state, it is known by the grasping means that the player has passed the first passage portion, and the second privilege can be awarded based on the grasping result. Therefore, it is considered that the player desires to be provided with the second privilege, to pass through the first passing portion during the special game state, that is, to be controlled by the first switching execution means. As a result of the above, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Features G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the first timing is set to a timing at which a game ball passes through the first passage portion side more easily than the second timing.

According to the above configuration, when the state switching control by the first switching execution means is performed, that is, when the first condition is satisfied, the game ball easily passes through the first passing portion, and therefore, based on the passing thereof. Easy to shift to the next specific control. Therefore, it is considered that the player has a great interest in whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, and as a result, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Features G3. There are a high-advantageous mode (opening/closing pattern of pattern A, a rescue mode or a special mode) in which the degree of advantage to the player is relatively high, and a low-advantageous mode (opening/closing pattern of patterns B and C, or a normal mode). Is set,
The second benefit is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode,
The second privilege granting means is configured to set one of the high-advantageous mode and the low-advantageous mode on the basis of the grasping result of the grasping means, the characteristic G1 or the characteristic G2. Gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the high advantageous mode or the low advantageous mode is set according to the passing situation to the first passing portion during the special game state. As a player, of course, he/she wants to be set to an advantageous high-advantage mode, so naturally, there is a great interest in the passing situation to the first passing portion. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game is increased.

Features G4. The feature G3 is characterized in that the second privilege granting means grants the second privilege based on the number of times or the timing of passage to the first passage portion as a result of the grasping by the grasping means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to give more attention to the passing situation of the first passing portion.

Features G5. As the special game state, the first special game state (opening/closing execution mode of the 2R continuation mode) in which the number of possible continuations of the specific control is set as the first number of times (for example, two times), and the number of times greater than the first number of times The second special game state (opening/closing execution mode of 16R continuous mode or continuous variable mode) set as the second number of times (for example, 16 times) is set,
In each of the special game states, setting means for setting which of the first switching execution means and the second switching execution means executes the specific control (function of executing the processing of step S1408 by the main controller 81) ),
The setting means is easy to set by the first switching execution means in the specific control in the first special game state, and easily set by the second switching execution means in the specific control in the second special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G4, which is characterized in that

According to the above configuration, each special game state is set as a special game state, the number of continuations of the specific control is different, and in the first special game state in which the number of continuations is small, the passing rate to the first passing portion is high. The first switching execution means is easily set, and the second switching execution means having a low passing rate to the first passing portion is easily set in the second special gaming state in which the number of continuations is larger than that. Then, the passage to the first passage portion in the special game state is grasped by the grasping means, and the second privilege is awarded based on the result. By doing so, it is possible to associate the advantage/disadvantage of the special game state with the granting of the second privilege by the second privilege granting means, and it is possible to diversify the game. Therefore, it becomes possible to make use of it for the interest improvement.

Features G6. There are a high-advantageous mode (opening/closing pattern of pattern A, a rescue mode or a special mode) in which the degree of advantage to the player is relatively high, and a low-advantageous mode (opening/closing pattern of patterns B and C, or a normal mode). Is set,
The second benefit is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode,
The second privilege granting means,
Based on that the grasping result of the grasping means is that the number of times the game ball has passed through the first passage portion is less than a specific number of times or that the passage timing is earlier than the specific passage timing. Set to the high advantageous mode,
As the grasping result of the grasping means, the low number is based on the second grasping result that the number of times the game ball has passed the first passage portion is equal to or greater than the specific number of times or the passage timing is after the specific passage timing. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the gaming machine is set to an advantageous mode.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine with the characteristic G5, the number of specific controls is small in the first special game state, so it is easy to pass to the first passing portion while the number of passages and the passage timing are the second special game. It can be faster than the condition. Therefore, in such a case, if the configuration is set to the high-advantageous mode, which is highly advantageous to the player, the advantage of the first special game state in which the player can easily pass through the first passing portion is further emphasized. Is possible. As a result, the interest can be improved.

Features G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the high-advantageous mode or the low-advantageous mode is set at the end of the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, it is easy to set the high advantageous mode after the first special game state and easily set the low advantageous mode after the second special game state. In the first special game state, the passing rate of the first passing portion is higher than in the second special game state, but the number of times of specific control is smaller than in the second special game state. Therefore, if the balance of the advantages of the first special game state and the second special game state is configured as described above, even if the first special game state in which the player tends to feel a disadvantage, it is advantageous after that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for the game.

Features G8. The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein the high-advantageous mode and the low-advantageous mode are set such that the predetermined condition is more easily established in the high-advantageous mode.

According to the above configuration, after the first special game state, the predetermined condition is satisfied again and the special game state is easily shifted. In this way, the player is convinced to continue the game even in the first special game state in which the number of times of the specific control is small. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Features G9. When the state switching control is performed by the first switching execution means, a timing at which the game ball received by the variable receiving means easily reaches the distribution means in the situation where the distribution means is the one aspect ( The variable receiving means is in the first state at the first timing including a timing at which V distribution can be performed),
When the state switching control is performed by the second switching execution means, the timing at which the game ball received by the variable receiving means does not easily reach the distribution means in the situation where the distribution means is the one aspect ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G8, characterized in that the variable receiving means is brought into the first state at the second timing including a timing at which V allocation is difficult to be performed).

According to the above configuration, the difference in the advantage between the high advantage mode and the low advantage mode (the special game state) is made with a simple configuration in which the timing of each state change control by the first change execution means and the second change execution means is made different. (Transition rate to) can be realized. Here, a configuration is also conceivable in which the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the special game state is changed (the probability of satisfaction of the predetermined condition is changed). However, in this case, various inconveniences may occur such as a complicated processing configuration inside the gaming machine and a reduction in the understanding level of the player. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the transition rate of the special game state is changed by a simple configuration in which the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means is changed and the timing of the distribution means is not changed. It is possible to diversify the game while avoiding the inconveniences described above.

Feature G10. A ball entering portion (first operating port 38, second operating port 39) provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering portion (function for executing a winning process for the working opening by the main controller 81),
A transition determining unit (a function of executing a win/loss determination process by the main control device 81) that determines whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquiring unit corresponds to predetermined transfer information; ,
Based on that the transition determination unit has made the transition determination, a predetermined notification unit starts a predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is ended as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transfer determination. As one game time, a notification control unit (a function for executing the effect process by the effect control device 82) for controlling the predetermined notification unit,
Period setting means for setting the production period of the game times (function for executing the variable display time setting process by the main control device 81),
Equipped with
The variable acceptance means executes the state switching control based on the notification of the transfer determination by the transfer determination means corresponding to the transfer information as the predetermined event by the notification control means. And
The distribution unit is configured such that switching to the first mode is performed after a specific period that is predetermined based on the fact that the special information has been the target of the shift determination,
There are a high-advantageous mode (opening/closing pattern of pattern A, a rescue mode or a special mode) in which the degree of advantage to the player is relatively high, and a low-advantageous mode (opening/closing pattern of patterns B and C, or a normal mode). Is set,
The second benefit is set as the high advantage mode or the low advantage mode,
In the high-advantageous mode, the period setting means makes it easy for the game ball received by the variable receiving means to reach the allocating means in the situation where the allocating means is the one aspect (V allocation is The gaming machine according to any one of features G5 to G9, characterized in that the effect period can be set so that it is a timing that can be performed).

According to the above configuration, the transition determination is performed based on the entry into the entry portion, and if the result of the transition determination corresponds to the transition information, the variable receiving means becomes the first state after the game has been played. In this case, in the high-advantage mode, when the switching of the sorting means occurs, the effect period of the game time is set so as to be easily distributed to the first passing portion side, so if the first passing portion is passed after that, Transition to the special game state. In this way, even in the first special game state in which the number of times of specific control is small, it is configured so that it is a so-called condominium, and it is very simple such as changing the timing of the state switching control of the variable receiving means. By realizing with a configuration, a novel game can be realized.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Variable receiving means (role) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state Object device 150),
Based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (start of a round game), the variable acceptance control means for executing the state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means (the opening/closing processing by the main control device 81 is executed. Function),
A specific passing portion (V winning passage 191a) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass,
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, a specific control (round game) in which the state switching control of the variable receiving means is performed a plurality of times (for example, 19 times, RC2) is performed a plurality of times (for example, 16 times, RC1). ) A special game state (opening/closing execution mode of the continuation rate variation mode) that can be executed over (), a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81),
Equipped with
In the specific control, a high-advantageous control mode and a low-advantageous control mode in which the timing of the state switching control is different are set so that the degree of advantage for the player becomes relatively high or low,
In the special game state, setting means for setting which of the high-advantageous control mode and the low-advantageous control mode is executed as the control mode of each specific control (the setting process of each round by the main control device 81 is executed. Function),
In a predetermined specific control of the special game state, switching means for generating a switch from the low-advantageous control mode to the high-advantageous control mode (function of executing setting processing for each opening by the main control device 81),
In the predetermined specific control, a special notification execution unit (a function of executing the opening support process by the effect control device 82) for executing a special notification by a predetermined notification unit (symbol display device 51),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, during the special game state, the special notification is given at the timing when the control mode of the variable receiving means is different. That is, the special notification is performed at the timing (predetermined specific control) at which the control mode is switched from the low-advantageous control mode having a low degree of advantage to the player to the high-advantageous control mode having a high degree of advantage. In this way, the player has a great deal of joy as the low advantageous control mode is switched to the high advantageous control mode when shifting to the special game state. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Features H2. In the special game state, in one of the specific controls, it is possible to perform the next specific control based on the continuation condition being satisfied when the game ball has passed through the specific passage section. The configuration is
The low-advantageous control mode and the high-advantageous control mode are different from each other in that the state change control mode of the variable receiving means is made different so that the continuation rate of the continuation condition is made different, and the high and low advantages are set. The gaming machine described in the feature H1, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, the low-advantageous control mode and the high-advantageous control mode are realized by the level of the continuation rate of the specific control during the special game state, and the level of the continuity rate is the state switching control of the variable receiving means. It is realized by the mode. In this way, while leaving the original enjoyment of the gaming machine, such as whether or not the game ball is received by the variable receiving means and whether or not it passes through the specific passage portion, the operation mode of the game ball is enjoyed. It is possible to diversify the game by expecting a special notification by a predetermined notification means.

Features H3. In the special game state, a first special game state in which a switch from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode may occur in the predetermined specific control, and the switch occurs in the predetermined specific control The second special game state, which is not, and the gaming machine according to the characteristic H1 or the characteristic H2, which is set.

According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether the special game state that has occurred is the first special game state or the second special game state, and further, it is the first special game state (switch to the high advantageous control mode). It is expected to be a substitute). As a result, it is considered that the attention to the predetermined specific control is increased and the interest in the special notification is also increased. As a result of the above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Features H4. In the first special game state, in the specific control before the predetermined specific control from the start of the first special game state, the state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode,
In the second special game state, in the specific control before the predetermined specific control from the start of the second special game state, the state switching control of each specific control is performed in the low advantageous control mode. The gaming machine described in the characteristic H3.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to identify, from the control mode of the variable receiving means, which of the first and second special game states the special game state has started from. Therefore, the expectation for the special notification during the predetermined specific control is increased.

Features H5. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the special game state is set to have a higher probability that the second special game state is selected than the first special game state.

According to the above configuration, even if the player shifts to the special game state, the player may think that it is in the second special game state and the attention level may be lowered. At such a timing, by executing the special notification and switching to the highly advantageous control mode (actually the first special game state), it is possible to suitably realize the surprise and joy of the player. It will be possible.

Features H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the switching means is performed at a specific number of times (RC2=11) of each state switching control in the predetermined specific control.

According to the above configuration, switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode occurs during the specific control (the specific number of times of the state switching control performed a plurality of times). By doing so, it is possible to expect that the above-mentioned switching will occur for each specific control performed a plurality of times in the special game state, and it becomes possible to raise interest in each specific control. ..

Features H7. The specific control includes a first specific control (pattern F) in which switching from the low advantageous control mode to the high advantageous control mode may occur, and a second specific control (pattern C) in which the switching does not occur. , Is set, the gaming machine according to feature H6.

According to the above configuration, the player is highly interested in whether each specific control in the special game state is the first specific control or the second specific control, and further, it is switched to the first specific control (high advantageous control mode). Stuff). As a result, it is considered that the attention to the predetermined specific control is increased and the interest in the special notification is also increased. As a result of the above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Features H8. In the first specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the state switching control before the state switching control of the specific number of times from the start of the first specific control,
Feature H7 is characterized in that in the second specific control, each state switching control is performed in the low advantageous control mode in the state switching control of the specific number of times from the start of the second specific control. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to identify from the control mode of the variable receiving means which of the first and second specific controls is started from the start of each specific control in the special game state. Therefore, the expectation for the specific notification of the specific number of times is increased.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A first mode in which a game ball flowing down the game area is distributed in a first direction and a second mode in which the game ball is distributed in a second direction different from the first direction at a predetermined timing. Distribution means (rotating body 201, first distribution member 300, second distribution member 310),
A second distribution means (opening/closing accessory) capable of switching between a third mode in which the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed in a third direction and a fourth mode in which the game balls are distributed in a fourth direction different from the third direction. 168),
A grasping unit that grasps which of the first mode and the second mode the first distribution unit is based on when a predetermined condition is satisfied (the process of step S2105 by the main controller 81 is performed). Function to execute)
Based on the grasping result by the grasping means, setting means for setting the switching manner between the third aspect and the fourth aspect of the second distributing means (the processing of steps S2107 to S2114 by the main control device 81 is performed. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the first distribution unit switches between the first mode and the second mode at a predetermined timing, and the second distribution unit changes according to the mode of the first distribution unit. The switching mode is set. That is, the first distribution unit that performs a fixed operation and the second distribution unit that performs an irregular operation are linked. As a result, it becomes possible to associate a plurality of distribution means, which are the first distribution means and the second distribution means, for changing the flow direction of the game ball. Therefore, the flow modes of the game balls can be various, and the interest can be improved.

Feature I2. The game machine according to feature I1, wherein the first distributing means is provided on a downstream side of the second distributing means in a flow path of the game ball.

According to the above configuration, by controlling the second distributing means, the first distributing means on the downstream side thereof is also controlled. Therefore, while simplifying the control configuration, it is possible to diversify the flow-down mode of the game ball using a plurality of distribution means.

Feature I3. A predetermined passage portion (V winning opening 182a) is provided on the downstream side of the first distributing means in the flow path of the game ball,
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the predetermined passing portion, a privilege granting unit (a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening/closing execution mode or round continuation) to the player. The game machine according to feature I2, which is provided with a function for executing.

According to the above configuration, the player can obtain a privilege if the game ball passes through the predetermined passage portion after the distribution by each distribution unit. In this case, one of the sorting means arranged upstream of the predetermined passage portion may perform a periodic operation, and the other may perform an irregular operation. While the fairness of the game is ensured by the distribution means side (first distribution means side) that is performed, the awarding rate of the privilege is increased by the distribution means side (second distribution means side) in which the irregular operation is performed. It becomes possible to adjust. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature I4. As the flow-down path to the predetermined passage portion, the first distribution means and the second distribution means are arranged so that the path from the first distribution means is shorter than the path from the second distribution means. The game machine according to feature I3, characterized in that the position of the means is set.

According to the above configuration, the sorting means on the side where the periodic operation is performed is arranged at a position closer to the predetermined passage portion. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel unfair.

Feature I5. The flow down path of the game ball is set so that the game ball can reach the predetermined passage portion regardless of whether the game ball is distributed in the first direction or the second direction by the first distribution means. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or feature I4.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, even if the first distribution means performs the regular distribution, it is possible to reach the predetermined passage portion, so that the fairness of the game is easily ensured.

In order to clarify the significance of the distribution by the first distribution means,
As a configuration, "the arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion is set to be relatively high depending on whether it is distributed in the first direction or in the second direction" Good.

Feature I6. The arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is set to be relatively high in the case of being distributed in the first direction and in the case of being distributed in the second direction,
The setting unit sets the second distribution unit so that the first distribution unit distributes the second distribution unit in a direction in which the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is low, based on the result of the grasping unit. The gaming machine according to feature I5, which is capable of being played.

According to the above configuration, it is considered that the player is pleased if the game is distributed to the side having a higher arrival rate to the predetermined passing portion. On the other hand, as described in the feature I5, since the predetermined passing portion can be reached regardless of the direction of distribution, whether or not the predetermined passing portion is reached when the passage rate is high. The enjoyment of seeing such an operation mode of the game ball may decrease. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the game as to whether or not the privilege is obtained depending on the operation mode of the game ball by setting the distribution by the second distribution means as described above.

Features I7. It is set such that the side from which the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is low has a higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side from which the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is high. A gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more effectively exhibit the enjoyment of viewing the operation mode of the game ball.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state (open state) in which a game ball can be received and a second state (closed state) in which it is harder to receive a game ball than the first state ( Accessory device 150),
A variable acceptance control means (a function of executing a game control process by the main control device 81) for performing a state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means,
A first passing portion (V winning passage 191a) and a second passing portion (passage passage 191b) through which the game balls received by the variable receiving means can pass;
A privilege granting unit (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main controller 81) for granting a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first passing portion.
A first mode (the position where the gaming ball received by the variable receiving means is easily distributed to the first passing portion side (a position where it is easy to lead to the V winning side by the rotating body 201), and the first mode is more than the first mode). A second mode in which it is difficult to distribute to the passage portion side (a position where the rotary body 201 can easily lead to the out side), and a distribution means (rotary body 201) that can be switched at a predetermined timing,
A grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S2105 by the main control device 81) for grasping a switching situation between the first aspect and the second aspect by grasping the distributing means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been met (whether the ball has entered the operating ports 38, 39, the opening waiting time has ended, the variable display time has ended, etc.), the grasping result by the grasping means is added. Then, the game state transition means (mainly the state transition control means capable of transitioning the state switching control of the variable acceptance means to a specific state in which the control processing can be executed a predetermined number of times (a state in which control processing is performed based on the result of normal opening) A function of executing the game control process by the control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the state switching control is performed so that the variable receiving means can receive the variable receiving means. Then, when the game ball received by the variable receiving means passes through the first passing portion, the privilege is given to the player. In this case, the grasping means grasps the state of the distribution member that determines whether or not the vehicle passes through the first passage portion, and the state switching control is performed in consideration of the grasping result of this grasping means. Therefore, for example, it can be made easy to pass through the first passage portion, or it can be made difficult to pass through the first passage portion. Therefore, the game is designed as a game machine designer's design, and the management of the discharge rate can be appropriately performed.

Features J2. The game state transition means,
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the game ball accepted by the variable accepting means is likely to reach the allocating means at the first timing (V allocation is The first state switching control mode (the opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 that makes it easy to perform V allocation) so that the variable receiving means is in the first state so as to include the timing that can be performed). ,
Based on the grasping result of the grasping means, the game ball accepted by the variable accepting means is difficult to reach the allocating means in the situation where the allocating means is in the one aspect. A second state switching control mode in which the variable receiving means is set to the first state so as to include a timing that is difficult to perform) (opening/closing control of the opening/closing accessory 168 that makes it difficult to perform V allocation). ,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the gaming machine has a configuration capable of shifting to the specific state including any of the above.

According to the above configuration, based on the grasping result by the grasping means, whether the game ball is distributed to the first passing portion side, the period required for the game ball received by the variable receiving means to reach the distributing means, etc. are taken into consideration. To be done. By doing so, it is possible to make the ball more exactly as designed by the designer.

Features J3. The grasping unit grasps the position of the distributing unit or a period (detection result by the rotational position detection sensor 196) from the previous switching timing, and thereby the switching situation between the first mode and the second mode. The game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, which has a configuration capable of grasping

According to the above configuration, the grasping unit can achieve the excellent effect of J1 with a simple configuration in which the grasping unit grasps the position of the allocating unit or the period from the previous switching timing of the allocating unit.

Features J4. The grasping means, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, when the game ball is received in the variable receiving means during the period in which the variable receiving means is in the first state, the game ball is The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, characterized in that the mode of the sorting means at the timing when the sorting means is reached can be grasped.

According to the above configuration, even if the game ball is received at any timing during the period when the variable receiving means is in the first state, the mode of the distributing means at the timing when the game ball reaches the distributing means is changed. Since it can be grasped, it is possible to more accurately determine the distribution ratio by the distribution means.

Features J5. The distribution unit has a rotating body that rotates at least in a predetermined cycle,
The grasping unit has a detection sensor for detecting the position of the rotating body, and is configured to grasp the position of the rotating body at least for the rotating body based on a detection result of the detecting sensor. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4.

According to the above configuration, the existing configuration can be appropriately used, and the excellent effect described in J1 can be achieved.

Features J6. The distribution unit includes a first distribution unit (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution unit (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution units.
The first distributing means is arranged on the upstream side of the second distributing means,
The first passage portion and the second passage portion are arranged on the downstream side of the second distribution unit,
While the grasping means is configured to grasp any position of the first allocating means and the second allocating means or a period from the previous switching timing, the first allocating means The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that the grasping result of the second sorting means is prioritized over the grasping result of 1.

According to the above configuration, the distribution status at a position closer to the first passage portion or the second passage portion can be determined by prioritizing the downstream grasping result. As a result, it is possible to set the state switching control of the variable receiving means in which the rate of granting the privilege based on the passage to the first passage portion is more accurately taken into consideration.

Features J7. The distribution unit includes a first distribution unit (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution unit (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution units.
The first distributing means is arranged on the upstream side of the second distributing means,
The first passage portion and the second passage portion are arranged on the downstream side of the second distribution unit,
When the game balls are distributed by the first distributing means, the game balls can be led out to the first passing portion without passing through the second distributing means,
Even if the grasping means grasps that the first distributing means can distribute the second passing means to the first passing portion side, The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, which is characterized by grasping a switching situation.

According to the above configuration, even if it is possible to distribute to the first passing portion side by the first distributing means, if the situation of the second distributing means is known, the state switching control of the variable receiving means can be performed. Regarding the setting, it is possible to reflect the situation of the second distribution means. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform more various setting of the state switching control.

Features J8. The distribution unit includes a first distribution unit (distribution members 300 and 310) and a second distribution unit (rotating body 201) as a plurality of distribution units.
The second distribution means is arranged at a position higher in visibility to the player than the first distribution means,
The game state transition means, if the grasping means grasps that it can be distributed to the first passing portion side by either the first distributing means or the second distributing means, the second distributing means The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, wherein the state switching control can be set so that the state switching control can be distributed to the first passing portion side by a dividing means.

According to the above configuration, the player can confirm the distribution by the distribution unit (the second distribution unit) on the higher visibility side. Therefore, the feature J1 is excellent, considering the original pleasure of the gaming machine, such as enjoying the operation of the game ball, not just the point of passing the ball through the first passing portion (the privilege should be given). It becomes possible to exert an effect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Based on a player's launching operation, launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area,
Distribution means (opening/closing accessory 168) capable of switching between a first mode in which the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed in a first direction and a second mode in which the game balls are distributed in a second direction different from the first direction. When,
A predetermined passage portion (V winning opening 182a) provided on the downstream side of the distribution means in the flow path of the game ball,
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the predetermined passing portion, a privilege granting means (a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege (for example, opening/closing execution mode or continuation of a round) to the player. Function to execute)
Equipped with
Regardless of whether the game ball is distributed in the first direction or the second direction, the flow path of the game ball is determined so that it can reach the predetermined passage portion.
The arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is set to be relatively high in the case of being distributed in the first direction and in the case of being distributed in the second direction,
When the distribution unit distributes to the side having a high arrival rate to the predetermined passage unit, a unit for changing the distribution to the side having a low arrival rate to the predetermined passage unit (first by the main control device 81). 2) A game machine having a function of executing opening/closing timing change processing).

According to the above configuration, the player is provided with a privilege by the game ball passing through the predetermined passage portion, and the distribution means is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined passage portion, depending on the distribution direction. The downflow route is set so that the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion becomes relatively high and low. In such a configuration, it is considered that the player desires to be distributed to a side having a higher arrival rate to a predetermined passing portion. However, if it is possible to reach the predetermined passage portion regardless of the distribution, it is determined whether the predetermined passage portion is distributed to the side having a lower arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion. It is possible to experience a thrilling feeling. In that respect, if a means for changing the distribution rate to the higher arrival rate side is allocated to the lower distribution side, it is possible to fully enjoy the flow of such game balls. It becomes possible to use it for improving the interest.

Features K2. It is set such that the side from which the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is low has a higher visibility from the front of the gaming machine than the side from which the arrival rate to the predetermined passage portion is high. A gaming machine according to feature K1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more effectively exhibit the enjoyment of viewing the operation mode of the game ball.

In addition, you may apply the technical idea shown to each invention of each characteristic A-K group mutually with respect to each invention of each characteristic A-K group, and combine some or all each characteristic A-K. It may be applied to each invention of group K. Further, it is possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each invention of the respective features A to K groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating machine game machines such as slot machines: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variable display of the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and the variation of the symbol starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating device for stop or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type gaming machine using a ball: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variably displaying the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and stopped. Due to the operation of the operation means or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game state advantageous to the player (bonus) as a necessary condition that the final stopped symbol at that time is a specific symbol. A loading device that is configured to generate a game or the like) and further includes a ball tray to perform a loading process for loading a game ball from the ball tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses the game ball to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in.

10... Pachinko machine, 24... Game board, 38... First operating port, 39... Second operating port, 51... Symbol display device, 60... Launching handle, 81... Main control device, 82... Production control device, 150... Role Object device, 168... Opening/closing part, 182a... V winning opening, 182b... Outlet, 192... V winning sensor, 193... Detaching sensor, 300... First sorting member, 300a... First sorting driving unit, 310 ... 2nd distribution member, 310a... 2nd distribution drive part, A... special opening, B... special opening.

Claims (2)

Based on the player's launch operation, launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A variable receiving means provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can be received and a second state in which it is more difficult to receive a game ball than the first state,
Variable acceptance control means for executing state switching control between the first state and the second state of the variable acceptance means,
A specific passing portion through which the game ball received by the variable receiving means can pass,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific passage portion,
At a predetermined timing, a first mode in which the game balls received by the variable receiving means are easily distributed to the specific passage part and a second mode in which the game balls are less likely to be distributed to the specific passage part than the first mode. Switching means that can be switched,
Grasping means for grasping a switching situation between the first aspect and the second aspect of the distributing means,
Equipped with
As the allocating means, a first allocating means and a second allocating means provided at a position easier for a player to visually recognize than the first allocating means,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the grasped result of said grasping means, said variable receiving means to accepted gaming balls, the first sorting means said first distributing means in situations in which the first aspect Ri as easy to reach the, and in so that an easy to reach the second distributing means in the context the second sorting means is the first aspect, wherein the variable receiving means at first timing second Based on the first state switching control mode for setting the 1 state and the grasping result of the grasping means, the game ball accepted by the variable accepting means is in the situation where the first distributing means is the first aspect. Ri as difficult to reach the first distributing means, and wherein the so that an easy to reach the second distributing means in the context second sorting means is the first aspect, the variable at the second timing A second state switching control mode in which the receiving means is in the first state, and a game state shifting means capable of shifting the state switching control of the variable receiving means including any one of a predetermined state that can be executed a predetermined number of times. Equipped with
When the predetermined state switching control in the specific state corresponds to the state switching control in the first state switching control mode, the predetermined state switching control is set as the state switching control in the second state switching control mode. A gaming machine characterized by being configured as follows . The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a launching operation means for performing the launching operation by a player.